<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<rss version="2.0"
	xmlns:content="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/content/"
	xmlns:wfw="http://wellformedweb.org/CommentAPI/"
	xmlns:dc="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/"
	xmlns:atom="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom"
	xmlns:sy="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/syndication/"
	xmlns:slash="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/slash/"
	>

<channel>
	<title>Tutorials-Photoshop.com</title>
	<atom:link href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/feed/" rel="self" type="application/rss+xml" />
	<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com</link>
	<description>Learn - Play - Create</description>
	<lastBuildDate>Mon, 16 Aug 2010 04:10:15 +0000</lastBuildDate>
	<language>en</language>
	<sy:updatePeriod>hourly</sy:updatePeriod>
	<sy:updateFrequency>1</sy:updateFrequency>
	<generator>http://wordpress.org/?v=3.0.1</generator>
		<item>
		<title>Photoshop Tutorial &#8211; Gold Bricks</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/photoshop-tutorial-gold-bricks/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/photoshop-tutorial-gold-bricks/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Tue, 15 Sep 2009 00:07:34 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Gold Bricks]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=1052</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<div class="feat_prods">
	<div class="feat_list">
    <input type='hidden' id='wpsc_slider_visibles' value='5'>
		<ul class="single_list">			
			
						
		</ul>
	</div>
	<img width="22" height="23" alt="previous" class="prev" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/plugins/product_slider/images/feat-prev.png"/>
	<img width="22" height="23" alt="next" class="next" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/plugins/product_slider/images/feat-next.png"/>
</div><a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/photoshop-tutorial-gold-bricks/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/goldbricks04-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="" title="" /></a>In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll create a room full of gold bricks (or regular bricks depending on how you wish to colorize them). One might think at first that this is a silly tutorial; however, it does have some applications. The gold bricks could be used in collages and various artwork montages. Not to mention, it&#8217;s a fun tutorial to do, because it&#8217;s so easy. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open up a new document in Photoshop. Set the canvas size to roughly 600&#215;600 pixels. 2. Goto Filter &#62; Render &#62; Lighting Effects. 3. Use the shape handles to adjust the oval on the left side, so that the lighting looks similar to the illustration below: 4. Click OK to close out of the &#8220;Lighting Effects&#8221; box. 5. Goto Filter &#62; Stylize &#62; Extrude 6. When the extrude pop-up appears, change the values. See illustration below: 7. Click OK to close the pop-up. You should now have an image of bricks. 8. Last step is to color them. Goto Image &#62; Adjustments &#62; Color Balance. Adjust the color sliders for &#8220;Yellow&#8221; under Shadows/Midtones/Highlites sections. 9. You should now have your room full of gold bricks.]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<div class="feat_prods">
	<div class="feat_list">
    <input type='hidden' id='wpsc_slider_visibles' value='5'>
		<ul class="single_list">			
			
						
		</ul>
	</div>
	<img width="22" height="23" alt="previous" class="prev" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/plugins/product_slider/images/feat-prev.png"/>
	<img width="22" height="23" alt="next" class="next" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/plugins/product_slider/images/feat-next.png"/>
</div><p><img class="alignnone" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/goldbricks04-150x150.gif" alt="" width="150" height="150" /><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-1053" title="goldbricks04" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/goldbricks04-150x150.gif" alt="goldbricks04" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll create a room full of gold bricks (or regular bricks depending on how you wish to colorize them). One might think at first that this is a silly tutorial; however, it does have some applications. The gold bricks could be used in collages and various artwork montages. Not to mention, it&#8217;s a fun tutorial to do, because it&#8217;s so easy.<br />
<span id="more-1052"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[
// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open up a new document in Photoshop. Set the canvas size to roughly 600&#215;600 pixels.</p>
<p>2. Goto Filter &gt; Render &gt; Lighting Effects.</p>
<p>3. Use the shape handles to adjust the oval on the left side, so that the lighting looks similar to the illustration below:</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/misc/gold-bricks/goldbricks01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. Click OK to close out of the &#8220;Lighting Effects&#8221; box.</p>
<p>5. Goto Filter &gt; Stylize &gt; Extrude</p>
<p>6. When the extrude pop-up appears, change the values. See illustration below:</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/misc/gold-bricks/goldbricks02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Click OK to close the pop-up. You should now have an image of bricks.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/misc/gold-bricks/goldbricks03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>8. Last step is to color them. Goto Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Color Balance. Adjust the color sliders for &#8220;Yellow&#8221; under Shadows/Midtones/Highlites sections.</p>
<p>9. You should now have your room full of gold bricks.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/misc/gold-bricks/goldbricks04.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/photoshop-tutorial-gold-bricks/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Photoshop Tutorial &#8211; Building A Maze</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/photoshop-tutorial-building-a-maze/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/photoshop-tutorial-building-a-maze/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Tue, 15 Sep 2009 00:06:00 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Building A Maze]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=1049</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/photoshop-tutorial-building-a-maze/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/maze06-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="maze06" title="maze06" /></a>Building a maze in Photoshop can be lots of fun. Mazes can be used to add fun and entertainment to your website. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll look at a simple way to create a maze from scratch. In addition, we&#8217;ll show you some extra features to make your finished maze look asthetically pleasing. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open up a new document in Photoshop. Set the canvas size to roughly 600&#215;600 pixels. 2. The first thing you must do when creating a maze is to turn on the Grid. This will provide you with a guide in which to draw the lines that make up your maze. To do this, goto View &#62; Show &#62; Grid from the main menu. 3. Now create a new layer and title it as &#8220;Maze&#8221;. 4. Next, select the &#8220;Line&#8221; tool from the toolbar. (See illustration below): 5. Then set the &#8220;Weigth&#8221; (located at the top of the menu bar) to represent the thickness of the line that you will be using in your maze illustration. For the purposes of this tutorial, I opted for a weight of &#8220;3 px&#8221; (3 pixels). 6. It&#8217;s optional if you want the &#8220;Anti-alias&#8221; checked or not. If [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-1050" title="maze06" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/maze06-150x150.gif" alt="maze06" width="101" height="101" /></p>
<p>Building a maze in Photoshop can be lots of fun. Mazes can be used to add fun and entertainment to your website. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll look at a simple way to create a maze from scratch. In addition, we&#8217;ll show you some extra features to make your finished maze look asthetically pleasing.<br />
<span id="more-1049"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open up a new document in Photoshop. Set the canvas size to roughly 600&#215;600 pixels.</p>
<p>2. The first thing you must do when creating a maze is to turn on the Grid. This will provide you with a guide in which to draw the lines that make up your maze. To do this, goto View &gt; Show &gt; Grid from the main menu.</p>
<p>3. Now create a new layer and title it as &#8220;Maze&#8221;.</p>
<p>4. Next, select the &#8220;Line&#8221; tool from the toolbar. (See illustration below):</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/misc/build-a-maze/maze01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Then set the &#8220;Weigth&#8221; (located at the top of the menu bar) to represent the thickness of the line that you will be using in your maze illustration. For the purposes of this tutorial, I opted for a weight of &#8220;3 px&#8221; (3 pixels).</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/misc/build-a-maze/maze02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. It&#8217;s optional if you want the &#8220;Anti-alias&#8221; checked or not. If you have it unchecked, it will create a pixelated maze.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/misc/build-a-maze/maze03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. With the &#8220;Maze&#8221; layer selected, you can now begin drawing out your maze. Keep in mind that to make straight lines, you need to hold down the SHIFT key as you drag the lines for your maze. Use the grid as a reference when drawing the lines of your maze.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/misc/build-a-maze/maze04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>8. Just continue to draw the lines as in Step 7 to create your own unique maze.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/misc/build-a-maze/maze05.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>9. Finally, turn off the grid by going to View &gt; Show &gt; Grid and then you have your custom maze.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/misc/build-a-maze/maze06.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/photoshop-tutorial-building-a-maze/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Donut Frame</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/donut-frame/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/donut-frame/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Tue, 15 Sep 2009 00:04:52 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Donut Frame]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[web graphics]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=1046</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/donut-frame/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/donutframe07-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="donutframe07" title="donutframe07" /></a>In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll create a cool 3D donut shaped frame for images and photos. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open up a new document in Photoshop. Set the canvas size to roughly around 600&#215;600 pixels. 2. Also open the image or photograph that will be framed. 3. Now create a new layer and title it as &#8220;Donut Border&#8221;. 4. With the Donut Border selected, select the Eliptical Marquee tool and draw a circle selection on the canvas. While you are drawing the circular selection, be sure to hold the SHIFT key down at the same time so that the circle selection is perfectly round. 5. Now, while holding down the ALT key, draw another circle selection within the previous circle selelction. Holding down the ALT key allows you to remove a new circle from the first circle selection, therefore creating the illustion of a donut style selection. (What makes an even better effect is if you draw the inner circle selection so that it skewed off to the side a bit). 6. Select the paint bucket tool, choose a color that pleases you, then click inside to fill the selection. You should now have a donut style illustration as so: [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-1047" title="donutframe07" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/donutframe07-150x150.gif" alt="donutframe07" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll create a cool 3D donut shaped frame for images and photos.<br />
<span id="more-1046"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open up a new document in Photoshop. Set the canvas size to roughly around 600&#215;600 pixels.</p>
<p>2. Also open the image or photograph that will be framed.</p>
<p>3. Now create a new layer and title it as &#8220;Donut Border&#8221;.</p>
<p>4. With the Donut Border selected, select the Eliptical Marquee tool and draw a circle selection on the canvas. While you are drawing the circular selection, be sure to hold the SHIFT key down at the same time so that the circle selection is perfectly round.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/donut-frame/donutframe01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Now, while holding down the ALT key, draw another circle selection within the previous circle selelction. Holding down the ALT key allows you to remove a new circle from the first circle selection, therefore creating the illustion of a donut style selection.<br />
(What makes an even better effect is if you draw the inner circle selection so that it skewed off to the side a bit).</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/donut-frame/donutframe02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. Select the paint bucket tool, choose a color that pleases you, then click inside to fill the selection. You should now have a donut style illustration as so:<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/donut-frame/donutframe03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Now let&#8217;s ad some 3 dimensional quality to the donut shape. Right click the &#8220;Circular Border&#8221; layer and select Blending Options.</p>
<p>8. Select Bevel and Emboss from the options in the Layer Style pop-up box that appears. Adjust the attributes, such as Depth, Size, Soften, so that you give the donut shape a 3D looking quality. Click OK when you are satisfied with the 3D appearance.</p>
<p>9. Still within the Layer Style pop-up box, select the Drop Shadow attribute. Adjust the shadow sliders, as well as the Distance, Spread, and Size attributes, so that the effect is pleasing to the eye.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/donut-frame/donutframe04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>10. Now copy and paste the image or photo into a new layer titled &#8220;Photo&#8221;. Make sure this pasted image/photo is on a layer titled &#8220;Photo&#8221; which is below the &#8220;Donut Border&#8221;. If all is going well by this point, you should be seeing your image/photo underneath the circular border. (See example below).</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/donut-frame/donutframe05.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>12. With the &#8220;Photo&#8221; layer still active, select the Circular Marquee tool again and draw a circle within the donut shape. See below:<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/donut-frame/donutframe06.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>13. Goto Select &gt; Inverse from the main menu.</p>
<p>14. Then click the delete key. You should now have your Donut Frame.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/donut-frame/donutframe07.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/donut-frame/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Metal Encasing &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/metal-encasing-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/metal-encasing-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Tue, 15 Sep 2009 00:03:56 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Metal Encasing]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[web graphics]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=1043</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/metal-encasing-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/redlogo08-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="redlogo08" title="redlogo08" /></a>Adding a metal encasing around your logo can add some extra spice. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through the steps for creating a red metal encased logo to use in your websites or graphic design projects. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Create a new file. Press Shift+ctrl+n to create a new layer. 2. Select Elliptical Marquee tool to draw a 200 pixel x 200 pixel sized circle in the middle of the canvas. 3. Select dark gray as background and white as foreground. Use gradient tool (Linear gradient) to fill the selection from left to right. 4. Keep selection active and go to Select&#62;Modify&#62;Contract and contract the selection by 10 pixels. Press delete and right click on the layer name and select blending options and give values like shown in the figure. Select Stroke and give stroke of #626161 color 1 pixel wide. 5. Keep the selection active and press shift+ctrl+n to have a new layer. Select Red color as foreground and Dark red as background. Select gradient tool and select Radial gradient and fill from top to bottom. Add a little inner shadow from blending options in it. 6. Keep the selection still active and create a new layer. Fill [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-1044" title="redlogo08" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/redlogo08-150x150.gif" alt="redlogo08" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Adding a metal encasing around your logo can add some extra spice. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through the steps for creating a red metal encased logo to use in your websites or graphic design projects.<br />
<span id="more-1043"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Create a new file. Press Shift+ctrl+n to create a new layer.</p>
<p>2. Select Elliptical Marquee tool to draw a 200 pixel x 200 pixel sized circle in the middle of the canvas.</p>
<p>3. Select dark gray as background and white as foreground. Use gradient tool (Linear gradient) to fill the selection from left to right.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/metal-encasing/redlogo01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. Keep selection active and go to Select&gt;Modify&gt;Contract and contract the selection by 10 pixels. Press delete and right click on the layer name and select blending options and give values like shown in the figure. Select Stroke and give stroke of #626161 color 1 pixel wide.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/metal-encasing/redlogo02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/metal-encasing/redlogo03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Keep the selection active and press shift+ctrl+n to have a new layer. Select Red color as foreground and Dark red as background. Select gradient tool and select Radial gradient and fill from top to bottom. Add a little inner shadow from blending options in it.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/metal-encasing/redlogo04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. Keep the selection still active and create a new layer. Fill the selection with white and reduce its opacity to 55%. Now press Ctrl+D to deselect. Move this layer 10pixel down and erase lower portion of the layer. You should have image like that.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/metal-encasing/redlogo05.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Draw a shape like that in middle of the red colored circle. To draw this shape, select custom shape tool and draw a custom shape named ‘Seal’.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/metal-encasing/redlogo06.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>8. Control click the layer and go to select&gt;modify&gt;contract. Contract it to 1 pixel and press delete. Reduce its opacity to 80%.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/metal-encasing/redlogo07.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>9. Our base area is ready. Now experiment with different shapes in the circle and add some text of your choice. Our logo is ready.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/metal-encasing/redlogo08.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/metal-encasing-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Old Video Camera Icon &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/old-video-camera-icon-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/old-video-camera-icon-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Tue, 15 Sep 2009 00:02:54 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Old Video Camera Icon]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[web graphics]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=1040</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/old-video-camera-icon-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/oldvc07.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="oldvc07" title="oldvc07" /></a>The selection tools in photoshop provide a great way to create and draw web graphics. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through the steps to creating an old video camera graphic. We&#8217;ll make use of the polygonal lasso and other various selection tools along the way. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Create a new file. 2. Create a new layer and select Rectangle Marquee Tool to draw a shape like shown in the picture. 3. Draw two more shapes in middle of the layer1. 4. Draw another rectangle as shown in the figure. 5. Select Polygonal Lasso Tool to draw a shape like shown in the figure and place it in front of rectangle which we created in step 4. 6. Select Polygonal Lasso Tool again and draw a shape and place it as shown in the figure and place it. 7. Again select Lasso tool and draw &#38; place the shape as shown in the figure. 8. Press ‘U’ or select custom shape tool and select Rounded Rectangle Tool. Draw and place that shape as shown in the figure. Our old style video camera icon is ready.]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-1041" title="oldvc07" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/oldvc07.gif" alt="oldvc07" width="99" height="71" /><br />
The selection tools in photoshop provide a great way to create and draw web graphics. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through the steps to creating an old video camera graphic. We&#8217;ll make use of the polygonal lasso and other various selection tools along the way.<br />
<span id="more-1040"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1.	Create a new file.</p>
<p>2.	Create a new layer and select Rectangle Marquee Tool to draw a shape like shown in the picture.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/old-video-camera/oldvc01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>3.	Draw two more shapes in middle of the layer1.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/old-video-camera/oldvc02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. Draw another rectangle as shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/old-video-camera/oldvc03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Select Polygonal Lasso Tool to draw a shape like shown in the figure and place it in front of rectangle which we created in step 4.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/old-video-camera/oldvc04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. Select Polygonal Lasso Tool again and draw a shape and place it as shown in the figure and place it.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/old-video-camera/oldvc05.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Again select Lasso tool and draw &amp; place the shape as shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/old-video-camera/oldvc06.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>8. Press ‘U’ or select custom shape tool and select Rounded Rectangle Tool. Draw and place that shape as shown in the figure. Our old style video camera icon is ready.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/old-video-camera/oldvc07.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/old-video-camera-icon-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Windows Media Player Icon &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/windows-media-player-icon-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/windows-media-player-icon-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Tue, 15 Sep 2009 00:02:01 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[web graphics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Windows Media Player Icon]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=1037</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/windows-media-player-icon-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/wmpicon06.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="wmpicon06" title="wmpicon06" /></a>Here is a tutorial that demonstrates how to create the Windows Media Player Icon from scratch. What&#8217;s great about this tutorial, is that there are lots of photoshop tools involved that help introduce their function and use to the artist. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Create a new file. 2. Create a new layer. Select Rectangle Marquee tool to draw a rectangle. Fill it with red color. Duplicate this layer by pressing ctrl+j. Right click on its layer name and select blending options. Under blending options, select color overlay and select green color for that. Repeat this step for two more times for yellow and dark blue color. Arrange these layers as shown in the picture. 3. Now select Elliptical Marquee too to draw a circle from the middle of the boxes. For that press alt+shift together and drag the circle. 4. Now press shift+ctrl+c or go to edit&#62;copy merged and paste this layer. 5. Now ctrl click on this layer’s name to select it. Keep the selection active and press shift+ctrl+n to create a new layer. Fill it with black color. Now deselect it. 6. Now select eraser tool and for the brush size select high featherd brush and start [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-1038" title="wmpicon06" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/wmpicon06.gif" alt="wmpicon06" width="91" height="90" /></p>
<p>Here is a tutorial that demonstrates how to create the Windows Media Player Icon from scratch. What&#8217;s great about this tutorial, is that there are lots of photoshop tools involved that help introduce their function and use to the artist.<br />
<span id="more-1037"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[
// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1.	Create a new file.</p>
<p>2. Create a new layer. Select Rectangle Marquee tool to draw a rectangle. Fill it with red color. Duplicate this layer by pressing ctrl+j. Right click on its layer name and select blending options. Under blending options, select color overlay and select green color for that. Repeat this step for two more times for yellow and dark blue color. Arrange these layers as shown in the picture.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/windows-media-player-icon/wmpicon01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Now select Elliptical Marquee too to draw a circle from the middle of the boxes. For that press alt+shift together and drag the circle.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/windows-media-player-icon/wmpicon02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>4.	Now press shift+ctrl+c or go to edit&gt;copy merged and paste this layer.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/windows-media-player-icon/wmpicon03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Now ctrl click on this layer’s name to select it. Keep the selection active and press shift+ctrl+n to create a new layer. Fill it with black color. Now deselect it.</p>
<p>6.	Now select eraser tool and for the brush size select high featherd brush and start erasing from the middle of the circle.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/windows-media-player-icon/wmpicon04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>7.	Select Elliptical marquee tool again to draw a circle in the center of the this layer and fill it with light gray color.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/windows-media-player-icon/wmpicon05.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>8. Now we will draw a triangular button in the middle of this gray colored circle. For that, select Polygonal Lasso Tool or press ‘L’ and draw a triangle in the middle of the circle. Press shift+ctrl+n to have a new layer and fill it with black. Press ctrl+d to deselect it. Right click on its layer name and select blending options. Under blending options, select bevel &amp; emboss. You now have Windows Media Player like icon.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/web-graphics/windows-media-player-icon/wmpicon06.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/windows-media-player-icon-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Weathered Wood / Paint Texture &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/weathered-wood-paint-texture-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/weathered-wood-paint-texture-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Tue, 15 Sep 2009 00:01:00 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Weathered Wood texture]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=1034</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/weathered-wood-paint-texture-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/weatheredwood04-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="weatheredwood04" title="weatheredwood04" /></a>Here is a nice and simple tutorial for making a wood texture that looks as though the paint has flaked off and left it looking weathered and old. This is great for using with other photoshop tutorials, such as text effect tutorials. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open a new document in Photoshop. Set the dimensions to 300&#215;300 px. 2. Create a new layer, name it &#8220;Wood Paint&#8221;. 3. Use the Paint Bucket tool and fill in the layer with the color that you want for your wood. 4. Goto Filter &#62; Noise &#62; Add Noise. Set the Amount: 20% Click the Gausian option Check the Monochromatic checkbox. Click OK to accept changes. 5. Goto Filter &#62; Blur &#62; Motion Blur. Set the Distance to 30 pixels. CLick OK to accept changes. 6. Goto Filter &#62; Sketch &#62; Note Paper. Set Image Balance: 25 Set Graininess: 10 Set Relief: 10 Click OK to accept changes.]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-1035" title="weatheredwood04" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/weatheredwood04-150x150.gif" alt="weatheredwood04" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Here is a nice and simple tutorial for making a wood texture that looks as though the paint has flaked off and left it looking weathered and old. This is great for using with other photoshop tutorials, such as text effect tutorials.<br />
<span id="more-1034"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open a new document in Photoshop. Set the dimensions to 300&#215;300 px.</p>
<p>2. Create a new layer, name it &#8220;Wood Paint&#8221;.</p>
<p>3. Use the Paint Bucket tool and fill in the layer with the color that you want for your wood.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/textures/weathered-wood/weatheredwood01.gif" alt="" /><br />
4. Goto Filter &gt; Noise &gt; Add Noise.<br />
Set the Amount: 20%<br />
Click the Gausian option<br />
Check the Monochromatic checkbox.<br />
Click OK to accept changes.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/textures/weathered-wood/weatheredwood02.gif" alt="" /><br />
5. Goto Filter &gt; Blur &gt; Motion Blur.<br />
Set the Distance to 30 pixels.<br />
CLick OK to accept changes.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/textures/weathered-wood/weatheredwood03.gif" alt="" /><br />
6. Goto Filter &gt; Sketch &gt; Note Paper.<br />
Set Image Balance: 25<br />
Set Graininess: 10<br />
Set Relief: 10<br />
Click OK to accept changes.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/textures/weathered-wood/weatheredwood04.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/weathered-wood-paint-texture-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Simple Wood Texture &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/simple-wood-texture-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/simple-wood-texture-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Tue, 15 Sep 2009 00:00:04 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Simple Wood Texture]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=1030</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/simple-wood-texture-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/woodtexture05-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="woodtexture05" title="woodtexture05" /></a>There are many tutorials that require a wood texture, most of them are text effect tutorials. Rather than having to search for wood textures on the web, it&#8217;s very simple to create your own wood texture from scratch using Photoshop. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through the basic steps to create a simple wood texture that you can use in your Photoshop projects. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open a new document in Photoshop. Set the dimensions to 200&#215;200 px. 2. Create a new layer, name it &#8220;Wood Texture&#8221;. 3. Use the Paint Bucket tool and fill in the layer with the color that you want for your wood. 4. Goto Filter &#62; Noise &#62; Add Noise. Set the Amount: 25% Click the Gausian option Check the Monochromatic checkbox. Click OK to accept changes. 5. Goto Filter &#62; Blur &#62; Motion Blur. Set the Distance to 300 pixels. CLick OK to accept changes. 6. You should now have what appear to be straight wood grain lines. 7. Goto Filter &#62; Liquify. Use an appropriate sized brush and begin pushing the wood grain lines so as to add some waves and variation. Try to make them appear random, yet flowing at the [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-1032" title="woodtexture05" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/woodtexture05-150x150.gif" alt="woodtexture05" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>There are many tutorials that require a wood texture, most of them are text effect tutorials. Rather than having to search for wood textures on the web, it&#8217;s very simple to create your own wood texture from scratch using Photoshop. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through the basic steps to create a simple wood texture that you can use in your Photoshop projects.<br />
<span id="more-1030"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open a new document in Photoshop. Set the dimensions to 200&#215;200 px.</p>
<p>2. Create a new layer, name it &#8220;Wood Texture&#8221;.</p>
<p>3. Use the Paint Bucket tool and fill in the layer with the color that you want for your wood.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/textures/wood-texture/woodtexture01.gif" alt="" /><br />
4. Goto Filter &gt; Noise &gt; Add Noise.<br />
Set the Amount: 25%<br />
Click the Gausian option<br />
Check the Monochromatic checkbox.<br />
Click OK to accept changes.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/textures/wood-texture/woodtexture02.gif" alt="" /><br />
5. Goto Filter &gt; Blur &gt; Motion Blur.<br />
Set the Distance to 300 pixels.<br />
CLick OK to accept changes.</p>
<p>6. You should now have what appear to be straight wood grain lines.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/textures/wood-texture/woodtexture03.gif" alt="" /><br />
7. Goto Filter &gt; Liquify. Use an appropriate sized brush and begin pushing the wood grain lines so as to add some waves and variation. Try to make them appear random, yet flowing at the same time. Click OK when you are done to exit the Liquify screen.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/textures/wood-texture/woodtexture04.gif" alt="" /><br />
8. Finally, goto Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Brightness/Contrast. Adjust the brightness and contrast sliders so that the grain of the wood stands out better.</p>
<p>9. You should now have a good looking wood texture to use in your projects.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/textures/wood-texture/woodtexture05.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/simple-wood-texture-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Basic Wood Texture &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/basic-wood-texture-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/basic-wood-texture-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:59:03 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Basic Wood Texture]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=1027</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/basic-wood-texture-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/woodtexture205-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="woodtexture205" title="woodtexture205" /></a>In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll look at a very basic way to creating a wood texture with knots. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open a new document in Photoshop. Set the dimensions to 200&#215;200 px. 2. Create a new layer, name it &#8220;Wood Texture&#8221;. 3. Use the Paint Bucket tool and fill in the layer with the color that you want for your wood. 4. Goto Filter &#62; Render &#62; Fiber. 5. When pop-up appears. Set Variance to 16.0 and set Strength to 13.0. Click OK to accept the changes. 6. Goto Filter &#62; Liquify. 7. Use an appropriate size brush to push the grain texture out in order to distinquish where the knots in the wood will go. 8. You should now have a wood texture with some knot shapes applied. 9. Finally, goto Image &#62; Adjustments &#62; Brightness/Contrast and adjust the sliders to get the depth of the grain that you desire.]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-1028" title="woodtexture205" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/woodtexture205-150x150.gif" alt="woodtexture205" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll look at a very basic way to creating a wood texture with knots.<br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p><span id="more-1027"></span><br />
1. Open a new document in Photoshop. Set the dimensions to 200&#215;200 px.</p>
<p>2. Create a new layer, name it &#8220;Wood Texture&#8221;.</p>
<p>3. Use the Paint Bucket tool and fill in the layer with the color that you want for your wood.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/textures/wood-texture-2/woodtexture201.gif" alt="" /><br />
4. Goto Filter &gt; Render &gt; Fiber.</p>
<p>5. When pop-up appears. Set Variance to 16.0 and set Strength to 13.0. Click OK to accept the changes.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/textures/wood-texture-2/woodtexture202.gif" alt="" /><br />
6. Goto Filter &gt; Liquify.</p>
<p>7. Use an appropriate size brush to push the grain texture out in order to distinquish where the knots in the wood will go.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/textures/wood-texture-2/woodtexture203.gif" alt="" /><br />
8. You should now have a wood texture with some knot shapes applied.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/textures/wood-texture-2/woodtexture204.gif" alt="" /><br />
9. Finally, goto Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Brightness/Contrast and adjust the sliders to get the depth of the grain that you desire.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/textures/wood-texture-2/woodtexture205.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/basic-wood-texture-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Mush or Molten Lava Texture &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/mush-or-molten-lava-texture-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/mush-or-molten-lava-texture-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:58:07 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Molten Lava Texture]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[mush texture]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=1024</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/mush-or-molten-lava-texture-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/mush03-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="mush03" title="mush03" /></a>In this tutorial, we show a quick and easy way to make a molten lava or mush type texture. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open a new document in Photoshop. Set the dimensions to 600&#215;600 px. 2. Goto Filter &#62; Render &#62; Difference Clouds. 3. Goto Filter &#62; Stylize &#62; Find Edges. 4. Goto Image &#62; Adjustments &#62; Brightness/Contrast. Slide the &#8220;Brightness&#8221; slider a little to the left (about -20). Slide the Contrast slider almost to the very right (about 85%). 5. Click OK and you should now have your Mush or Molten Lava texture. 6. Goto Image &#62; Adjustments &#62; Color Balance. Play with the color sliders to change the color of the texture.]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-1025" title="mush03" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/mush03-150x150.gif" alt="mush03" width="100" height="100" /><br />
In this tutorial, we show a quick and easy way to make a molten lava or mush type texture.<br />
<span id="more-1024"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open a new document in Photoshop. Set the dimensions to 600&#215;600 px.</p>
<p>2. Goto Filter &gt; Render &gt; Difference Clouds.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/textures/mush/mush01.gif" alt="" /><br />
3. Goto Filter &gt; Stylize &gt; Find Edges.</p>
<p>4. Goto Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Brightness/Contrast. Slide the &#8220;Brightness&#8221; slider a little to the left (about -20). Slide the Contrast slider almost to the very right (about 85%).</p>
<p>5. Click OK and you should now have your Mush or Molten Lava texture.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/textures/mush/mush02.gif" alt="" /><br />
6. Goto Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Color Balance. Play with the color sliders to change the color of the texture.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/textures/mush/mush03.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/mush-or-molten-lava-texture-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Mozaic Tile Texture &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/mozaic-tile-texture-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/mozaic-tile-texture-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:57:05 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Mozaic Tile Texture]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=1021</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/mozaic-tile-texture-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/mozaictiletexture04-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="mozaictiletexture04" title="mozaictiletexture04" /></a>Here is a basic tutorial for creating an interesting mozaic tile texture by using the &#8220;Render &#62; Clouds&#8221; and &#8220;Distort &#62; Wave&#8221; filters. In the end, you can colorize it using Hue/Saturation. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Create a new file of 200&#215;200 pixel wide. 2. Create a new layer and fill it with black color. 3. Go to filter&#62;render&#62;clouds. 4. Press Ctrl+f for 3 times to have a picture like that. 5. Go to filter&#62;disort&#62;waves&#8230; and give the values like shown in the figure: 6. You are now having background like shown in the figure. 7. If you want, than you can color it by pressing Ctrl+U (hue/saturation box) click on colorize box and have a great colored background.]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-1022" title="mozaictiletexture04" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/mozaictiletexture04-150x150.gif" alt="mozaictiletexture04" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Here is a basic tutorial for creating an interesting mozaic tile texture by using the &#8220;Render &gt; Clouds&#8221; and &#8220;Distort &gt; Wave&#8221; filters. In the end, you can colorize it using Hue/Saturation.<br />
<span id="more-1021"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Create a new file of 200&#215;200 pixel wide.</p>
<p>2. Create a new layer and fill it with black color.</p>
<p>3. Go to filter&gt;render&gt;clouds.</p>
<p>4. Press Ctrl+f for 3 times to have a picture like that.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/textures/mozaic-tile-texture/mozaictiletexture01.gif" alt="" /><br />
5. Go to filter&gt;disort&gt;waves&#8230; and give the values like shown in the figure:</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/textures/mozaic-tile-texture/mozaictiletexture02.gif" alt="" /><br />
6. You are now having background like shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/textures/mozaic-tile-texture/mozaictiletexture03.gif" alt="" /><br />
7. If you want, than you can color it by pressing Ctrl+U (hue/saturation box) click on colorize box and have a great colored background. <img src='http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-includes/images/smilies/icon_smile.gif' alt=':)' class='wp-smiley' /> </p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/textures/mozaic-tile-texture/mozaictiletexture04.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/mozaic-tile-texture-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Chalk Text Effect &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/chalk-text-effect-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/chalk-text-effect-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:56:05 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Chalk Text Effect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[effects]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=1018</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/chalk-text-effect-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/chalktext06-150x117.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="chalktext06" title="chalktext06" /></a>Here&#8217;s a fun, yet easy to follow tutorial that shows how to make a chalk effect that looks like it&#8217;s on asphalt texture. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open a new document in Photoshop. Set the dimensions to 550&#215;150 px. 2. Create a new layer. Name it &#8220;Asphalt&#8221;. 3. Use the Paint Bucket tool and fill in the entire layer with black. 4. Goto Filter &#62; Sketch &#62; Reticulation. Set Density: 12 Set Foreground Level: 40 Set Background Level: 5 Click OK to accept changes. 5. You should now have an asphalt texture similar to the following: 6. Now select the Type tool and select white as your color. Type a word over the asphalt texture. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll type &#8220;PHOTOSHOP&#8221;. 7. Change the layer properties for the text layer to &#8220;Overlay&#8221;. 8. Goto Layer &#62; Duplicate Layer&#8230; Click OK when the duplicate layer pop-up appears. 9. Goto Filter &#62; Blur &#62; Gaussian Blur. Click OK when asked to rasterize the type. 10. The Guassian Blur pop-up will then appear. Set the Radius to 3.5 pixels. Click OK to accept changes. 11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 to create a third text layer that has been blurred with the Gaussian [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-1019" title="chalktext06" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/chalktext06-150x117.gif" alt="chalktext06" width="100" height="79" /></p>
<p>Here&#8217;s a fun, yet easy to follow tutorial that shows how to make a chalk effect that looks like it&#8217;s on asphalt texture.<br />
<span id="more-1018"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open a new document in Photoshop. Set the dimensions to 550&#215;150 px.</p>
<p>2. Create a new layer. Name it &#8220;Asphalt&#8221;.</p>
<p>3. Use the Paint Bucket tool and fill in the entire layer with black.</p>
<p>4. Goto Filter &gt; Sketch &gt; Reticulation.<br />
Set Density: 12<br />
Set Foreground Level: 40<br />
Set Background Level: 5<br />
Click OK to accept changes.</p>
<p>5. You should now have an asphalt texture similar to the following:</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/chalk-text/chalktext01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. Now select the Type tool and select white as your color. Type a word over the asphalt texture. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll type &#8220;PHOTOSHOP&#8221;.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/chalk-text/chalktext02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Change the layer properties for the text layer to &#8220;Overlay&#8221;.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/chalk-text/chalktext03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>8. Goto Layer &gt; Duplicate Layer&#8230; Click OK when the duplicate layer pop-up appears.</p>
<p>9. Goto Filter &gt; Blur &gt; Gaussian Blur. Click OK when asked to rasterize the type.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/chalk-text/chalktext04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>10. The Guassian Blur pop-up will then appear. Set the Radius to 3.5 pixels. Click OK to accept changes.</p>
<p>11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 to create a third text layer that has been blurred with the Gaussian Blur filter.</p>
<p>12. If you followed the preceding steps correctly, you should have three (3) text layers that says &#8220;PHOTOSHOP&#8221;. One that is still a type layer and two duplicate layers above it that have been rasterized and blurred with the Guassian Blur filter.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/chalk-text/chalktext05.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>13. This will result in your final chalk on asphalt text effect.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/chalk-text/chalktext06.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/chalk-text-effect-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Radial Text Effect (Photoshop Tutorial)</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/radial-text-effect-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/radial-text-effect-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:55:03 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Radial Text Effec]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=1015</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/radial-text-effect-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/radialtext03-150x74.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="radialtext03" title="radialtext03" /></a>Creating a radial text effect is a great way to add some extra excitement to your text images, labels, or buttons. What&#8217;s nice about this effect is that it works great in animated gifs, where the text seems to come out at you. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through the necessary steps in order to create a radial zoom effect for text. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open up a new document in Photoshop. Roughly around 600 x 200 in size. 2. Using the text tool, type anything you want. If the background is dark, then make sure the text is light (and vice-versa). In this example, we&#8217;ll type the word &#8220;Photoshop&#8221;. 3. Goto Layer &#62; Duplicate Layer&#8230; 4. Click OK when the Duplicate Layer pop-up box appears. 5. Goto Filter &#62; Blur &#62; Radial Blur. 6. A pop-up will appear asking if you wish to rasterize the type layer. Click OK to accept. 7. When the Radial Blur pop-up appears. Set the Amount to 100. Set the Blur Method to Zoom. Set the Quality to Best. 8. Click OK to accept the Radial Blur changes. You should now have your text with the radial blur.]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-1016" title="radialtext03" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/radialtext03-150x74.gif" alt="radialtext03" width="102" height="51" /></p>
<p>Creating a radial text effect is a great way to add some extra excitement to your text images, labels, or buttons. What&#8217;s nice about this effect is that it works great in animated gifs, where the text seems to come out at you. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through the necessary steps in order to create a radial zoom effect for text.<br />
<span id="more-1015"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open up a new document in Photoshop. Roughly around 600 x 200 in size.</p>
<p>2. Using the text tool, type anything you want. If the background is dark, then make sure the text is light (and vice-versa). In this example, we&#8217;ll type the word &#8220;Photoshop&#8221;.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/radial-text/radialtext01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Goto Layer &gt; Duplicate Layer&#8230;</p>
<p>4. Click OK when the Duplicate Layer pop-up box appears.</p>
<p>5. Goto Filter &gt; Blur &gt; Radial Blur.</p>
<p>6. A pop-up will appear asking if you wish to rasterize the type layer. Click OK to accept.</p>
<p>7. When the Radial Blur pop-up appears. Set the Amount to 100. Set the Blur Method to Zoom. Set the Quality to Best.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/radial-text/radialtext02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>8. Click OK to accept the Radial Blur changes. You should now have your text with the radial blur.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/radial-text/radialtext03.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/radial-text-effect-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Creating Outline Text (Photoshop Tutorial)</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/creating-outline-text-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/creating-outline-text-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:53:55 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Outline Text]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=1012</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/creating-outline-text-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/outlinetext06-150x125.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="outlinetext06" title="outlinetext06" /></a>Outline text can add an extra cool effect to our artwork and graphic projects. In fact, there are lots of ways to create outline text. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll examine how to create it using a different technique than that used by &#8220;Blending Properties&#8221; functionality. The reason we aren&#8217;t using the &#8220;Blending Options&#8221; in this tutorial is because the techniques involved can help you with coming up with your own creative uses of manipulating selections on separate layers. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open up a new document in Photoshop. 2. Using the text tool, type anything you want. In this example, we&#8217;ll type the word &#8220;Photoshop&#8221;. 3. Next, use the magic wand tool and click on the text. The text should now have selection dashes around it showing that it is selected. 4. From the main menu, goto Select &#62; Modify &#62; Expand. Choose a number above &#8220;1&#8243; pixel (I chose &#8220;2&#8243; as the pixel amount). 5. Next, create a new layer under the text layer. 6. Fill this selection on this new layer with what ever color you want using the paint bucket. 7. Finally, merge all the layers from the main menu. Goto Layer &#62; Flatten Image.]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-1013" title="outlinetext06" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/outlinetext06-150x125.gif" alt="outlinetext06" width="100" height="84" /></p>
<p>Outline text can add an extra cool effect to our artwork and graphic projects. In fact, there are lots of ways to create outline text. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll examine how to create it using a different technique than that used by &#8220;Blending Properties&#8221; functionality. The reason we aren&#8217;t using the &#8220;Blending Options&#8221; in this tutorial is because the techniques involved can help you with coming up with your own creative uses of manipulating selections on separate layers.<br />
<span id="more-1012"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open up a new document in Photoshop.</p>
<p>2. Using the text tool, type anything you want. In this example, we&#8217;ll type the word &#8220;Photoshop&#8221;.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/outline-text/outlinetext01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Next, use the magic wand tool and click on the text. The text should now have selection dashes around it showing that it is selected.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/outline-text/outlinetext02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. From the main menu, goto Select &gt; Modify &gt; Expand. Choose a number above &#8220;1&#8243; pixel (I chose &#8220;2&#8243; as the pixel amount).<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/outline-text/outlinetext03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Next, create a new layer under the text layer.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/outline-text/outlinetext04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. Fill this selection on this new layer with what ever color you want using the paint bucket.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/outline-text/outlinetext05.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Finally, merge all the layers from the main menu. Goto Layer &gt; Flatten Image.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/outline-text/outlinetext06.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/creating-outline-text-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Outline Inner Shading Text Effect</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/outline-inner-shading-text-effect/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/outline-inner-shading-text-effect/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:52:47 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Shading Text Effect]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=1009</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/outline-inner-shading-text-effect/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/outlineinnershading06-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="outlineinnershading06" title="outlineinnershading06" /></a>What I like espeically about this text tutorial is that it&#8217;s a great effect to use on text when creating logos. In this photoshop tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk you through the process of converting standard text so that it has an outline as well as an inner shading effect. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open a new document in Photoshop. Preferablly, the canvas should be 300&#215;300 pixels in order to provide you with a sufficient amount of of room to work with. 2. Select the Type tool and create a new type layer by typing the lower case letter &#8220;a&#8221;. 3. Goto Layer &#62; Rasterize &#62; Type. 4. Right click the &#8220;Type Layer&#8221;. Choose &#8220;Blending Options&#8221; from the pop-up list. Select &#8220;Stroke&#8221; and change the settings to the following: 5. Click OK to accept changes. 6. Now select the &#8220;Magic Wand&#8221; tool. 7. With the type layer active, use the magic wand tool and click on the letter &#8220;a&#8221;. 8. Goto Select &#62; Modify &#62; Contract. Enter &#8220;3px&#8221; for the amount to contract the selection. Click OK to accept changes. 9. Select the Paint Bucket tool. Fill in the selection with a lighter shade of the color you used for the text. [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-1010" title="outlineinnershading06" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/outlineinnershading06-150x150.gif" alt="outlineinnershading06" width="101" height="101" /></p>
<p>What I like espeically about this text tutorial is that it&#8217;s a great effect to use on text when creating logos. In this photoshop tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk you through the process of converting standard text so that it has an outline as well as an inner shading effect.<br />
<span id="more-1009"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open a new document in Photoshop. Preferablly, the canvas should be 300&#215;300 pixels in order to provide you with a sufficient amount of of room to work with.</p>
<p>2. Select the Type tool and create a new type layer by typing the lower case letter &#8220;a&#8221;.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/outline-inner-shading/outlineinnershading01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Goto Layer &gt; Rasterize &gt; Type.</p>
<p>4. Right click the &#8220;Type Layer&#8221;. Choose &#8220;Blending Options&#8221; from the pop-up list. Select &#8220;Stroke&#8221; and change the settings to the following:</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/outline-inner-shading/outlineinnershading02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Click OK to accept changes.</p>
<p>6. Now select the &#8220;Magic Wand&#8221; tool.</p>
<p>7. With the type layer active, use the magic wand tool and click on the letter &#8220;a&#8221;.</p>
<p>8. Goto Select &gt; Modify &gt; Contract. Enter &#8220;3px&#8221; for the amount to contract the selection. Click OK to accept changes.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/outline-inner-shading/outlineinnershading03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>9. Select the Paint Bucket tool. Fill in the selection with a lighter shade of the color you used for the text.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/outline-inner-shading/outlineinnershading04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>10. With the selection still in place. Goto Filter &gt; Blur &gt; Gaussian Blur. Set the Radius to 5px. Click OK to accpet changes.</p>
<p>11. Click CTRL+D to remove the selection. You should now have your outlined inner shading text effect.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/outline-inner-shading/outlineinnershading05.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>12. As a extra bonus touch. Right click the &#8220;Type&#8221; layer and choose &#8220;Blending Options from the pop-up list.</p>
<p>13. Select &#8220;Drop Shadow&#8221; from the pop-up list and apply a shadow to the text.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/outline-inner-shading/outlineinnershading06.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/outline-inner-shading-text-effect/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Unique Custom Text Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/unique-custom-text-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/unique-custom-text-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:50:49 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Unique Custom Text]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=1006</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/unique-custom-text-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/uniquetext06-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="uniquetext06" title="uniquetext06" /></a>Are you bored of the standard library of fonts that your computers has or the thousands of fonts on the Internet that don&#8217;t quite give you the effect that you are looking for. Well, this tutorial will helpfully solve this problem. This tutorial will show you how to design, from scratch, some of the most wackiest styles of text you can imagine. The outcome will only be limited by your imagination. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open a new document in Photoshop. Preferablly, the canvas should be 500&#215;500 pixels in order to provide you with a sufficient amount of of room to work with. 2. First off, create a new layer and name it &#8220;Letter&#8221;. 3. Now select the Rectangular Marquee Tool and draw a good sized rectangular selection in the center of your canvas. 4. Fill in the selection with any color you choose. 5. Now from the main menu at the top, goto Filter &#62; Liquify. 6. When the Liquify pop-up box appears, select a brush from the options on the right. With one of these brushes selected, begin pushing and manipulating the box into whatever style of letter that you want. 7. In this tutorial, I decided to [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-1007" title="uniquetext06" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/uniquetext06-150x150.gif" alt="uniquetext06" width="100" height="100" /><br />
Are you bored of the standard library of fonts that your computers has or the thousands of fonts on the Internet that don&#8217;t quite give you the effect that you are looking for. Well, this tutorial will helpfully solve this problem. This tutorial will show you how to design, from scratch, some of the most wackiest styles of text you can imagine. The outcome will only be limited by your imagination.<br />
<span id="more-1006"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open a new document in Photoshop. Preferablly, the canvas should be 500&#215;500 pixels in order to provide you with a sufficient amount of of room to work with.</p>
<p>2. First off, create a new layer and name it &#8220;Letter&#8221;.</p>
<p>3. Now select the Rectangular Marquee Tool and draw a good sized rectangular selection in the center of your canvas.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/unique-text/uniquetext01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. Fill in the selection with any color you choose.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/unique-text/uniquetext02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Now from the main menu at the top, goto Filter &gt; Liquify.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/unique-text/uniquetext03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. When the Liquify pop-up box appears, select a brush from the options on the right. With one of these brushes selected, begin pushing and manipulating the box into whatever style of letter that you want.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/unique-text/uniquetext04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. In this tutorial, I decided to create the letter &#8220;G&#8221;. Once you are pleased with the letter, click OK to return to your canvas.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/unique-text/uniquetext05.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>8. Last step. Give the letter some extra flair by using the &#8220;Blending Properties&#8221; from right clicking the layer with the letter on it. In the example below, I gave it bevel and shadow attributes.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/unique-text/uniquetext06.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>9. Repeat all the steps above to make more unique letters in order to spell something. This technique is also great for designing logos.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/unique-custom-text-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Texturized Text</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/texturized-text/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/texturized-text/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:49:50 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Texturized Text]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=1003</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/texturized-text/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/texturizedtext06-150x105.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="texturizedtext06" title="texturizedtext06" /></a>Creating textured or patterned text can be a great way to liven up the text on your website or art project. The become especially useful in the design of logos when you want to throw in that extra something to make it shine. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll step through the process of creating text that is made up of a texture or pattern image. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open up a new document in Photoshop. Make the background white. 2. Copy and paste your texture image into a new layer over the white background. Call this layer &#8220;Image&#8221;. 3. Using the text tool, type anything you want. In this example, we&#8217;ll type the tutorial, we&#8217;ll type the word &#8220;Texturized&#8221;. (Use a color for your text that easy to see over the textured background. If the texture is dark, then I typically use white. If the texture is light, then I typically use white.) Once you finish typing, this will automatically create a new Type layer. 5. Select the Magic Wand tool. 6. With the Type layer active, click the Magic Wand on any area that isn&#8217;t text. 7. Click the &#8220;Layer Visibility Icon&#8221; for the Type layer to turn it [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-1004" title="texturizedtext06" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/texturizedtext06-150x105.gif" alt="texturizedtext06" width="100" height="71" /></p>
<p>Creating textured or patterned text can be a great way to liven up the text on your website or art project. The become especially useful in the design of logos when you want to throw in that extra something to make it shine. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll step through the process of creating text that is made up of a texture or pattern image.<br />
<span id="more-1003"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open up a new document in Photoshop. Make the background white.</p>
<p>2. Copy and paste your texture image into a new layer over the white background. Call this layer &#8220;Image&#8221;.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/texturized-text/texturizedtext01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Using the text tool, type anything you want. In this example, we&#8217;ll type the tutorial, we&#8217;ll type the word &#8220;Texturized&#8221;. (Use a color for your text that easy to see over the textured background. If the texture is dark, then I typically use white. If the texture is light, then I typically use white.)</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/texturized-text/texturizedtext02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>Once you finish typing, this will automatically create a new Type layer.</p>
<p>5. Select the Magic Wand tool.</p>
<p>6. With the Type layer active, click the Magic Wand on any area that isn&#8217;t text.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/texturized-text/texturizedtext03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Click the &#8220;Layer Visibility Icon&#8221; for the Type layer to turn it off (see image below).</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/texturized-text/texturizedtext04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>8. Now select the background layer so that it is the active layer.</p>
<p>9. Click the Delete key.</p>
<p>10. Click CTRL+D to remove the selection.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/texturized-text/texturizedtext05.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>11. Right click the &#8220;Image&#8221; layer, choose &#8220;Blending Options&#8221; from the pop-up list.</p>
<p>12. When the Blending Options pop-up appears, click the checkboxes for &#8220;Drop Shadow&#8221; and a &#8220;Bevel &amp; Emboss&#8221;. Adjust the sliders and values under their properties until you get the shadow and bevel effect that you like best. (Use the preview as a guide to help you).</p>
<p>13. You should now have your texturized text.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/texturized-text/texturizedtext06.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/texturized-text/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Rough Style Text Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/rough-style-text-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/rough-style-text-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:48:55 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[effects]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Rough Style Text]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=1000</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/rough-style-text-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/roughtext02-150x49.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="roughtext02" title="roughtext02" /></a>Apply a roughed in text can be useful for adding style to any font. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll follow a simple step-by-step procedure in order to take any style of text and give it a roughed or cracked look. The choice of font doesn&#8217;t matter, as the steps below will apply to all types of font. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open a new document in Photoshop. 2. Use the Type Tool and create some text. For example, type &#8220;Crumbled&#8221;. 3. Right click the &#8220;Crumbled&#8221; text layer and select &#8220;Rasterize Type&#8221; 4. Use the &#8220;Magic Wand&#8221; tool and select the &#8220;Crumbled&#8221; text. 5. Using the shortcut key &#8220;Q&#8221;, this will cause you to go into Quick Mask Mode. 6. Goto Filter -&#62; Pixelate -&#62; Crystalized. Choose a Cell Size depending on the size of the text. Click OK. 7. Press &#8220;CTRL + I&#8221; to invert the selected mask. 8. Click the shortcut key &#8220;Q&#8221; again, this will take you out of Quick Mask Mode. 9. Now click the &#8220;Delete&#8221; key. You should now how your crumbled text effect.]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-1001" title="roughtext02" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/roughtext02-150x49.gif" alt="roughtext02" width="101" height="33" /></p>
<p>Apply a roughed in text can be useful for adding style to any font. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll follow a simple step-by-step procedure in order to take any style of text and give it a roughed or cracked look. The choice of font doesn&#8217;t matter, as the steps below will apply to all types of font.<br />
<span id="more-1000"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open a new document in Photoshop.</p>
<p>2. Use the Type Tool and create some text. For example, type &#8220;Crumbled&#8221;.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/rough-text/roughtext01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Right click the &#8220;Crumbled&#8221; text layer and select &#8220;Rasterize Type&#8221;</p>
<p>4. Use the &#8220;Magic Wand&#8221; tool and select the &#8220;Crumbled&#8221; text.</p>
<p>5. Using the shortcut key &#8220;Q&#8221;, this will cause you to go into Quick Mask Mode.</p>
<p>6. Goto Filter -&gt; Pixelate -&gt; Crystalized. Choose a Cell Size depending on the size of the text. Click OK.</p>
<p>7. Press &#8220;CTRL + I&#8221; to invert the selected mask.</p>
<p>8. Click the shortcut key &#8220;Q&#8221; again, this will take you out of Quick Mask Mode.</p>
<p>9. Now click the &#8220;Delete&#8221; key. You should now how your crumbled text effect.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/rough-text/roughtext02.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/rough-style-text-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Texture Outline</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/texture-outline/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/texture-outline/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:47:37 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Texture Outline]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=997</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/texture-outline/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/textureoutline07-150x108.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="textureoutline07" title="textureoutline07" /></a>Creating a texture outline for your text can add a little bit of flavor and spice to enhance your website or graphic design projects. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through the steps in order to create a texturized outline surrounding any type of regular font that you decide to use. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open up the texture that you plan to use in Photoshop. 2. Select the Type tool and type your text over the texture background (when you begin typing, it should automatically create a new layer). 3. Select the Magic Wand tool. 4. Make sure the Text layer is active. Click outside of the text area to select everything except the text. 5. Goto Select &#62; Modify &#62; Contract. 6. When the pop-up appears, enter the amount of pixels in width that you want the outlined texture to be. For the size of the font in this tutorial, I chose &#8220;2&#8243; for the pixel size. 7. Click OK and you should have a selection like the image below: 8. Make sure the Background layer is active. Click the Delete key. 9. Click Ctrl+D to deselect the image. 10. You should now have your outline texture text. (Below [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-998" title="textureoutline07" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/textureoutline07-150x108.jpg" alt="textureoutline07" width="100" height="72" /></p>
<p>Creating a texture outline for your text can add a little bit of flavor and spice to enhance your website or graphic design projects. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through the steps in order to create a texturized outline surrounding any type of regular font that you decide to use.<br />
<span id="more-997"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open up the texture that you plan to use in Photoshop.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/texture-outline/textureoutline01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. Select the Type tool and type your text over the texture background (when you begin typing, it should automatically create a new layer).</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/texture-outline/textureoutline02.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Select the Magic Wand tool.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/texture-outline/textureoutline03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. Make sure the Text layer is active. Click outside of the text area to select everything except the text.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/texture-outline/textureoutline04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Goto Select &gt; Modify &gt; Contract.</p>
<p>6. When the pop-up appears, enter the amount of pixels in width that you want the outlined texture to be. For the size of the font in this tutorial, I chose &#8220;2&#8243; for the pixel size.</p>
<p>7. Click OK and you should have a selection like the image below:</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/texture-outline/textureoutline05.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>8. Make sure the Background layer is active. Click the Delete key.</p>
<p>9. Click Ctrl+D to deselect the image.</p>
<p>10. You should now have your outline texture text.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/texture-outline/textureoutline06.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>(Below is the outline with &#8220;4&#8243; pixel width from Step 6)</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/text-effects/texture-outline/textureoutline07.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/texture-outline/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Peeling Effect With Objects and Items</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/peeling-effect-with-objects-and-items/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/peeling-effect-with-objects-and-items/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:46:44 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Peeling Effect]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=994</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/peeling-effect-with-objects-and-items/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/peelobject05-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="peelobject05" title="peelobject05" /></a>This tutorial could fall under two categories actually. One the one hand, it is a 3D style effect that we are aiming for, where as on the other hand, it also falls into the category of special effects. The benefits of knowing how to peel objects are nothing more than a cool way to impress your viewers. Incorporated into an art-piece or graphic design project, it can also impress the viewers with the cool effect that results. So let&#8217;s begin. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open up new document in Photoshop. Make sure the dimensions of the document are large enough to support your object. I find that rounded objects work the best, so I chose an orange. 2. Make sure to create a new layer, call it &#8220;Orange 1&#8243;. Paste the object (orange) on this new layer. 3. With the &#8220;Orange 1&#8243; layer selected, goto Layer &#62; Duplicate Layer. Name the duplicate layer &#8220;Orange 2&#8243;. Click OK when the pop-up appears. 4. You should now have two identical layers of the oranges (objects). 5. Next step is to select the lower &#8220;Orange 1&#8243; layer. Make sure this orange is darker than the duplicate orange in the &#8220;Orange 2&#8243; layer. To [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-995" title="peelobject05" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/peelobject05-150x150.jpg" alt="peelobject05" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>This tutorial could fall under two categories actually. One the one hand, it is a 3D style effect that we are aiming for, where as on the other hand, it also falls into the category of special effects. The benefits of knowing how to peel objects are nothing more than a cool way to impress your viewers. Incorporated into an art-piece or graphic design project, it can also impress the viewers with the cool effect that results. So let&#8217;s begin.<br />
<span id="more-994"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open up new document in Photoshop. Make sure the dimensions of the document are large enough to support your object. I find that rounded objects work the best, so I chose an orange.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/special-effects/peeling-objects/peelobject01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. Make sure to create a new layer, call it &#8220;Orange 1&#8243;. Paste the object (orange) on this new layer.</p>
<p>3. With the &#8220;Orange 1&#8243; layer selected, goto Layer &gt; Duplicate Layer. Name the duplicate layer &#8220;Orange 2&#8243;. Click OK when the pop-up appears.</p>
<p>4. You should now have two identical layers of the oranges (objects).</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/special-effects/peeling-objects/peelobject02.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Next step is to select the lower &#8220;Orange 1&#8243; layer. Make sure this orange is darker than the duplicate orange in the &#8220;Orange 2&#8243; layer. To do this, simply goto Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Brightness/Contrast.</p>
<p>6. When the Brightness/Contrast pop-up appears, adjust the Brightness/Contrast sliders to make the orange on the &#8220;Orange 1&#8243; layer to be darker. Click OK to accept the Brightness/Contrast changes.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/special-effects/peeling-objects/peelobject03.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Now make sure the &#8220;Orange 2&#8243; layer that is above is selected. Begin by erasing the shaped areas of the orange that you want to represent the inside part of the peel. As you erase, you can see that the darker orange from &#8220;Orange 1&#8243; layer shows underneath.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/special-effects/peeling-objects/peelobject04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>8. Make sure the &#8220;Orange 1&#8243; layer is now active. Using the eraser tool, begin erasing the areas of the dark orange so that it appears to be a twirling peel. If needed, alternate between &#8220;Orange 1&#8243; and &#8220;Orange 2&#8243; layers, erasing the sections required so that they create the swirling peel effect.</p>
<p>9. You&#8217;re done! You should now have an object that looks like it&#8217;s been peeled.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/special-effects/peeling-objects/peelobject05.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/peeling-effect-with-objects-and-items/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Sith Eyes &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/sith-eyes-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/sith-eyes-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:45:43 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Sith Eyes]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=991</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/sith-eyes-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/sitheyes07-150x147.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="sitheyes07" title="sitheyes07" /></a>One of the most popular sagas in the history of film is the Star Wars saga. In these series of films, there exist a villian known as the Sith. The main characteristics of the Sith are their evil looking eyes. In this photoshop tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk you through the process of how to convert normal looking eyes into Sith Eyes. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open in Photoshop a photograph of the eyes that you want to convert into Sith Eyes. 2. Click the &#8220;Edit in Quick Mask Mode&#8221; button. Choose an appropriate size brush size and begin draw your mask over the retinas of the eyes. (When you are in Quick Mask Mode&#8221;, the area you paint will be a transparent red to indicate which areas you are painting the mask over). 3. After you have finished painting in the mask for both eyes, then click &#8220;Edit in Standard Mode&#8221; to exit the Quick Mask mode. 4. Goto Select &#62; Inverse. Only the eyes should be selected now. 5. Goto Image &#62; Adjustments &#62; Color Balance. 6. When the Color Balance pop-up appears, adjust the color sliders under Shadows, Midtones, and Highlights. So that the retinas of the eyes become [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-992" title="sitheyes07" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/sitheyes07-150x147.jpg" alt="sitheyes07" width="100" height="98" /><br />
One of the most popular sagas in the history of film is the Star Wars saga. In these series of films, there exist a villian known as the Sith. The main characteristics of the Sith are their evil looking eyes. In this photoshop tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk you through the process of how to convert normal looking eyes into Sith Eyes.<br />
<span id="more-991"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open in Photoshop a photograph of the eyes that you want to convert into Sith Eyes.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/sith-eyes/sitheyes01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. Click the &#8220;Edit in Quick Mask Mode&#8221; button. Choose an appropriate size brush size and begin draw your mask over the retinas of the eyes. (When you are in Quick Mask Mode&#8221;, the area you paint will be a transparent red to indicate which areas you are painting the mask over).</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/sith-eyes/sitheyes02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/sith-eyes/sitheyes03.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. After you have finished painting in the mask for both eyes, then click &#8220;Edit in Standard Mode&#8221; to exit the Quick Mask mode.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/sith-eyes/sitheyes04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. Goto Select &gt; Inverse. Only the eyes should be selected now.</p>
<p>5. Goto Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Color Balance.</p>
<p>6. When the Color Balance pop-up appears, adjust the color sliders under Shadows, Midtones, and Highlights. So that the retinas of the eyes become a light yellowish color.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/sith-eyes/sitheyes05.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Creat a new layer. Call it &#8220;Sith Color&#8221;.</p>
<p>8. Make sure the &#8220;Sith Color&#8221; layer is active. Select the Paint Brush tool. Choose an dark orange/red color.</p>
<p>9. Begin drawing an orange/red ring around the retina of both eyes.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/sith-eyes/sitheyes06.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>10. With the &#8220;Sith Color&#8221; layer still active. Goto Filter &gt; Blur &gt; Gaussian Blur. When the Gaussian Blur pop-up appears, set the Radius Pixel amount so that the red ring around the retinas blur just a little.</p>
<p>11. You&#8217;re almost done. All you need to do now is select the Paint Brush tool. Zoom in and paint the pupils black to finish it off.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/sith-eyes/sitheyes07.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>12. Congratulations! You should now have your Sith Eyes.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/sith-eyes-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Eye Shadow / Eyeliner &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/eye-shadow-eyeliner-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/eye-shadow-eyeliner-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:44:49 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Eye Shadow]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=988</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/eye-shadow-eyeliner-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/eyeshadow07-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="eyeshadow07" title="eyeshadow07" /></a>Adding make-up to a person&#8217;s photograph is a great way to get an idea of how they would look with that make-up in real life. This is a great tool for make-up artists, as well as photoshop artists in general. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll take a step-by-step look into the process of adding eye shadow and eyeliner to a person&#8217;s photograph using Photoshop. Then we&#8217;ll learn to adjust the coloring of the make-up to get different looks. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open in Photoshop a photograph of a person. Make sure that photograph is one where the eyes are clearly visible and easy to work with. 2. Create a new layer and name it &#8220;Makeup&#8221;. 3. Choose &#8220;black&#8221; from the Swatches palette. 4. Select the paint brush tool. Choose a brush size that is proportionate to the size of the eyes in the photograph. Make sure the opacity of the paint brush tool is set to 30%. 5. Begin painting the dark black of the eye shadow around each of the eyes. Since your paint brush is set to an opacity level, try to draw the eye shadow in one shot, meaning do not lift up on the mouse button [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-989" title="eyeshadow07" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/eyeshadow07-150x150.jpg" alt="eyeshadow07" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Adding make-up to a person&#8217;s photograph is a great way to get an idea of how they would look with that make-up in real life. This is a great tool for make-up artists, as well as photoshop artists in general. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll take a step-by-step look into the process of adding eye shadow and eyeliner to a person&#8217;s photograph using Photoshop. Then we&#8217;ll learn to adjust the coloring of the make-up to get different looks.<br />
<span id="more-988"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open in Photoshop a photograph of a person. Make sure that photograph is one where the eyes are clearly visible and easy to work with.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/eye-shadow/eyeshadow01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. Create a new layer and name it &#8220;Makeup&#8221;.</p>
<p>3. Choose &#8220;black&#8221; from the Swatches palette.</p>
<p>4. Select the paint brush tool. Choose a brush size that is proportionate to the size of the eyes in the photograph. Make sure the opacity of the paint brush tool is set to 30%.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/eye-shadow/eyeshadow02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Begin painting the dark black of the eye shadow around each of the eyes. Since your paint brush is set to an opacity level, try to draw the eye shadow in one shot, meaning do not lift up on the mouse button once you start painting. This is so you can paint an even coat of eye shadow around the eyes.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/eye-shadow/eyeshadow03.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. Select the Smudge tool. Set the Strength settings to 35%. Now smudge the eye shadow coloring from Step 5 so that it blends nicely with the eyes.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/eye-shadow/eyeshadow04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Now for the eyeliner. Select the paint brush tool. Choose a smaller brush size that is proportionate to the lining around the eyes. Set the opacity of the paint brush tool to 70%.</p>
<p>8. With &#8220;black&#8221; still active as your color. Begin painting around the lining of the eyes.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/eye-shadow/eyeshadow05.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>9. Select the Smudge tool again. Keep it on the same settings as in Step 6 (Strength: 35%). Smudge the eyeliner in strokes going away from the eye, blending it outwards. Don&#8217;t smudge too much or you will completely smudge away the eyeliner. Just smudge a little so it blends and doesn&#8217;t stand out so much.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/eye-shadow/eyeshadow06.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>10. You&#8217;re done. The person in your photograph should now have eye shadow and eyeliner.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/eye-shadow/eyeshadow07.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>11. To change the color of the eyeshadow and eyeliner, make sure that the &#8220;Makeup&#8221; layer is active. Then goto Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Color Balance. Adjust the sliders until you get the color eyeshadow and eyeliner that you want.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/eye-shadow-eyeliner-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Open Wound</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/open-wound/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/open-wound/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:43:49 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Open Wound]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=985</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/open-wound/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/openwound07-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="openwound07" title="openwound07" /></a>Open wounds and slitted cuts are great for horror images. In this photoshop tutorial, we&#8217;ll look at how to create a deep slitted wound in the skin. This can be applied to any part of the body, just be sure that the shape of the wound that you draw matches the contours of the skin surface. For example, if you are applying this cut to the cheek, then you need to make sure to draw the wound shape around the ball of the cheek or the edge of the jaw. Another application for this tutorial could be to show a slitted wrist. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open in Photoshop a photograph of the body part for adding the open wound. For example, a leg or an arm. 2. Creat a new layer. Call it &#8220;Wound&#8221;. 3. Select the pen tool and draw the shape of the slitted wound. Be sure to close the path of the shape. 4. Right click the path, then choose &#8220;Make Selection&#8221;. When the pop-up appears, make sure Feather Radius is zero, Anti-alias is checked, and the operation is a New Selection. Click OK to complete converting the path to a selection. 5. With the &#8220;Wound&#8221; [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-986" title="openwound07" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/openwound07-150x150.jpg" alt="openwound07" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Open wounds and slitted cuts are great for horror images. In this <em>photoshop tutorial</em>, we&#8217;ll look at how to create a deep slitted wound in the skin. This can be applied to any part of the body, just be sure that the shape of the wound that you draw matches the contours of the skin surface. For example, if you are applying this cut to the cheek, then you need to make sure to draw the wound shape around the ball of the cheek or the edge of the jaw. Another application for this tutorial could be to show a slitted wrist.<br />
<span id="more-985"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open in Photoshop a photograph of the body part for adding the open wound. For example, a leg or an arm.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/open-wound/openwound01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. Creat a new layer. Call it &#8220;Wound&#8221;.</p>
<p>3. Select the pen tool and draw the shape of the slitted wound. Be sure to close the path of the shape.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/open-wound/openwound02.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. Right click the path, then choose &#8220;Make Selection&#8221;. When the pop-up appears, make sure Feather Radius is zero, Anti-alias is checked, and the operation is a New Selection. Click OK to complete converting the path to a selection.</p>
<p>5. With the &#8220;Wound&#8221; layer active, use the Paint Bucket tool to fill in the selection with a blood red color.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/open-wound/openwound03.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. Select the Paint Brush, choose a much darker red color, then paint along the left side of the wound selection area. The idea here is to show a perspective of the skin layer. The light red color is the perspective for the layer of skin and the dark red is the inside of the wound.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/open-wound/openwound04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Create a new layer. Call it &#8220;Skin Highlight&#8221;.</p>
<p>8. Goto Select &gt; Inverse from the main menu. This will switch the selection so that you can work on everything except the wound.</p>
<p>9. Select the Paint Brush, choose a lighter shade of color than the skin that the wound is on. Begin painting a very thin line around the edges of the wound.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/open-wound/openwound05.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>10. Now select the Smudge tool. Set the opacity to 30%. Begin smudging the white areas outwords so that it blends with the surrounding skin.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/open-wound/openwound06.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>11. You should now have a good representation of a slitted wound on the skin.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/open-wound/openwound07.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/open-wound/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Lip Gloss &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/lip-gloss-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/lip-gloss-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:42:17 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Lip Gloss]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=982</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/lip-gloss-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/lipgloss01-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="lipgloss01" title="lipgloss01" /></a>In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll learn the step-by-step procedure for applying lip gloss or lipstick to a person&#8217;s photograph. Aside from the benefit of seeing what one might look with a different shade of lip color, it&#8217;s also great for make-up artists when they are designing for film projects or modeling appearance. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open in Photoshop a photograph of a person. Make sure that the lips are clearly visible in the photo so that they are easy to work on. I find that a front portrait shot works the best. 2. Name the photograph layer &#8220;Face&#8221;. 3. Create a new layer over the &#8220;Face&#8221; layer and name it &#8220;Lips&#8221;. 4. Zoom in close to the lips to get a better view. When you are zoomed in close, it also allows you more precise control when applying the lip color. 5. Select the Paint Brush tool and a lip color that you would like to apply to the lips. Choose a brush size that will give you greater control for painting over the lips. 6. Set the opacity for the Paint Brush to 50%. 6. With the &#8220;Lips&#8221; layer active, begin coloring in the lips with the Paint Brush [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-983" title="lipgloss01" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/lipgloss01-150x150.jpg" alt="lipgloss01" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll learn the step-by-step procedure for applying lip gloss or lipstick to a person&#8217;s photograph. Aside from the benefit of seeing what one might look with a different shade of lip color, it&#8217;s also great for make-up artists when they are designing for film projects or modeling appearance.<br />
<span id="more-982"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open in Photoshop a photograph of a person. Make sure that the lips are clearly visible in the photo so that they are easy to work on. I find that a front portrait shot works the best.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/lip-gloss/lipgloss01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. Name the photograph layer &#8220;Face&#8221;.</p>
<p>3. Create a new layer over the &#8220;Face&#8221; layer and name it &#8220;Lips&#8221;.</p>
<p>4. Zoom in close to the lips to get a better view. When you are zoomed in close, it also allows you more precise control when applying the lip color.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/lip-gloss/lipgloss02.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Select the Paint Brush tool and a lip color that you would like to apply to the lips. Choose a brush size that will give you greater control for painting over the lips.</p>
<p>6. Set the opacity for the Paint Brush to 50%.</p>
<p>6. With the &#8220;Lips&#8221; layer active, begin coloring in the lips with the Paint Brush tool. Try to stay within the borders of the lips and not overlap onto the surrounding skin of the subject&#8217;s face.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/lip-gloss/lipgloss03.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Next, outline the lips with a darker version of the same lip color. Use a smaller paint brush to be more precise with the outline.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/lip-gloss/lipgloss04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. Now select the smudge tool, set the Strength to around 40%. Then begin blending the dark outline of the lip color with the color of the lips. (If any color went over the edges of the lips, simply use the eraser tool and erase along the edges to clean it up.)</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/lip-gloss/lipgloss05.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. If you want, you can adjust the Opacity settings of the &#8220;Lips&#8221; layer to lighten the shade of the lip gloss. It&#8217;s up to you.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/lip-gloss/lipgloss06.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>8. Congratulations! You have just learned to apply lip gloss to the lips.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/lip-gloss-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Angry Face &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/angry-face-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/angry-face-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:34:02 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Angry Face]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photo effect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photoshop tutorial]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=978</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/angry-face-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/angryface04-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="angryface04" title="angryface04" /></a>Here&#8217;s a fun tutorial for changing the face expressions of people in their photographs. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll cover the procedure involved in making a person&#8217;s face become angry and upset. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open in Photoshop a photograph of a person&#8217;s face. Make sure that the face is a close up. Below is an example of the photo we will be using. As you can see, the girl has a somewhat normal face expression. Now let&#8217;s change that and make her expression one that looks angry. 2. First thing, goto Filter &#62; Liquify. 3. When the Liquify box appears, set the brush size to one that is slightly large. 4. Using the brush, begin to push the eye brows of the person&#8217;s face down slightly. Try to not push any other part of the image while doing so. Keep your brush at such a size that it will only manipulate the eyebrow areas. 5. As you can see from above, just pushing the eyebrows in a slanted position is enough to already make her look upset. We still need to adjust the mouth, however. 6. So assuming you are still in the Liquify box, use a smaller brush [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-979" title="angryface04" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/angryface04-150x150.jpg" alt="angryface04" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Here&#8217;s a fun tutorial for changing the face expressions of people in their photographs. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll cover the procedure involved in making a person&#8217;s face become angry and upset.<br />
<span id="more-978"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open in Photoshop a photograph of a person&#8217;s face. Make sure that the face is a close up.<br />
Below is an example of the photo we will be using. As you can see, the girl has a somewhat normal face expression. Now let&#8217;s change that and make her expression one that looks angry.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/angry-face/angryface01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. First thing, goto Filter &gt; Liquify.</p>
<p>3. When the Liquify box appears, set the brush size to one that is slightly large.</p>
<p>4. Using the brush, begin to push the eye brows of the person&#8217;s face down slightly. Try to not push any other part of the image while doing so. Keep your brush at such a size that it will only manipulate the eyebrow areas.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/angry-face/angryface02.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. As you can see from above, just pushing the eyebrows in a slanted position is enough to already make her look upset. We still need to adjust the mouth, however.</p>
<p>6. So assuming you are still in the Liquify box, use a smaller brush to begin pushing down the corners of the person&#8217;s mouth.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/angry-face/angryface03.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Congrats! You&#8217;re done and yes, it was a very easy tutorial. What should have finally ended up with is the transformation of a normal, complacent face expression&#8230;into one that is not happy and obviously upset.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/angry-face/angryface04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/angry-face-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Sutures and Stitches</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/sutures-and-stitches/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/sutures-and-stitches/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:32:12 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Sutures and Stitches]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=974</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/sutures-and-stitches/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/sutures07-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="sutures07" title="sutures07" /></a>Without a doubt, this is a handsome man. What were to happen if we were to change that. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll utilize some technigues in order to apply sutures, stitches, and scars to this face. This is a great tutorial for anyone interested in special effects makeup. Enjoy! // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open in Photoshop a photograph of a person for adding sutures, stitches, and blemishes. 2. The first thing to do is add a scar. Considering the straight on angle of this photo, we&#8217;ll start with the cheek. 3. Create a new layer over the person&#8217;s photograph and name it &#8220;Redness&#8221;. 4. With the &#8220;Redness&#8221; layer active, select the painbrush tool. Choose a variation of red for the color. Set the opacity of the paintbrush to 30%. Also, choose a size paint brush that is adequate for creating a line that will be used for the bruising that surrounds the stitch. 5. Now is where we have to add some realism to the cut. To do this, we use the smudge too. Select the Smudge tool, set the &#8220;Strength&#8221; setting to 15%. Then begin smudging the line that represents the bruising line you created before 6. Next, add [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-975" title="sutures07" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/sutures07-150x150.jpg" alt="sutures07" width="100" height="100" /><br />
Without a doubt, this is a handsome man. What were to happen if we were to change that. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll utilize some technigues in order to apply sutures, stitches, and scars to this face. This is a great tutorial for anyone interested in special effects makeup. Enjoy!<br />
<span id="more-974"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[
// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open in Photoshop a photograph of a person for adding sutures, stitches, and blemishes.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/sutures/sutures01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. The first thing to do is add a scar. Considering the straight on angle of this photo, we&#8217;ll start with the cheek.</p>
<p>3. Create a new layer over the person&#8217;s photograph and name it &#8220;Redness&#8221;.</p>
<p>4. With the &#8220;Redness&#8221; layer active, select the painbrush tool. Choose a variation of red for the color. Set the opacity of the paintbrush to 30%. Also, choose a size paint brush that is adequate for creating a line that will be used for the bruising that surrounds the stitch.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/sutures/sutures02.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Now is where we have to add some realism to the cut. To do this, we use the smudge too. Select the Smudge tool, set the &#8220;Strength&#8221; setting to 15%. Then begin smudging the line that represents the bruising line you created before</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/sutures/sutures03.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. Next, add a very thin dark red line that goes straight through the bruising mark. Be sure to use a very fine brush size for this. Select the smudge tool again and ligthly smudge this dark line.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/sutures/sutures04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. The time has come to add the sutures and stitches to the cut.<br />
Select the paint brush tool, choose &#8220;black&#8221; as your color, and set the opacity to 100%. Start by creaitng cross hatches of small black lines across the dark red line that you made before in Step 5.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/sutures/sutures05.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>8. Now add splotches of bruised red at the end points of each of the sutures or stitches. Don&#8217;t make the splotches too pronounced or they won&#8217;t appear realistic. If necessary, create a new layer for the splotches and use your smutch tool to tone down the redness.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/sutures/sutures06.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>9. The last step is to desaturate the image. The reason for this is that it give the person a battered appearance. So goto Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Hue/Saturation.</p>
<p>10. When the pop-up appears, move the Saturation slider to the left just a bit. This will help blend the stitches withe the face also.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-retouch/sutures/sutures07.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/sutures-and-stitches/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Fade Out Border</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/fade-out-border/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/fade-out-border/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:31:13 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Fade Out Border]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=971</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/fade-out-border/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/fadeoutborder05-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="fadeoutborder05" title="fadeoutborder05" /></a>Creating a border that fades out is a great way to add spice to your photos. They can give a delicate touch when fading out to white and help give a contained feeling to your photo. This photoshop tutorial will walk you through the steps to creating a border for your photos that fades out to a solid color. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open up an image in Photoshop. 2. Select the Eliptical Marquee tool. 3. Create a circular selection around the person or object in the photo. 4. Goto Select &#62; Feather. When the Feather pop-up box appears, enter 20 as the pixel amount. 5. Goto Select &#62; Inverse (or hold down Shift+Ctrl+I). The selection should now be reversed. 6. Create a new layer called &#8220;White Border&#8221;. 7. With the &#8220;White Border&#8221; layer active, select the paint brush tool and fill in the selection with white. (You can use any other color besides white if you want to).]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-972" title="fadeoutborder05" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/fadeoutborder05-150x150.jpg" alt="fadeoutborder05" width="100" height="100" /><br />
Creating a border that fades out is a great way to add spice to your photos. They can give a delicate touch when fading out to white and help give a contained feeling to your photo. This photoshop tutorial will walk you through the steps to creating a border for your photos that fades out to a solid color.<br />
<span id="more-971"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open up an image in Photoshop.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-effects/fade-out-border/fadeoutborder01.jpg" alt="" /><br />
2. Select the Eliptical Marquee tool.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-effects/fade-out-border/fadeoutborder02.jpg" alt="" /><br />
3. Create a circular selection around the person or object in the photo.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-effects/fade-out-border/fadeoutborder03.jpg" alt="" /><br />
4. Goto Select &gt; Feather. When the Feather pop-up box appears, enter 20 as the pixel amount.</p>
<p>5. Goto Select &gt; Inverse (or hold down Shift+Ctrl+I). The selection should now be reversed.</p>
<p>6. Create a new layer called &#8220;White Border&#8221;.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-effects/fade-out-border/fadeoutborder04.jpg" alt="" /><br />
7. With the &#8220;White Border&#8221; layer active, select the paint brush tool and fill in the selection with white. (You can use any other color besides white if you want to).</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-effects/fade-out-border/fadeoutborder05.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/fade-out-border/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Grave Stone Engraving</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/grave-stone-engraving/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/grave-stone-engraving/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:30:11 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Grave Stone Engraving]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=968</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/grave-stone-engraving/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/gravestone06-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="gravestone06" title="gravestone06" /></a>This tutorial is more for fun than anything else. As we walk through this tutorial, we&#8217;ll demonstrate how to take a grave or tomb stone and create text that looks as though it&#8217;s been engraved upon it. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open up a photo of a grave or tombstone. If the photo already has an engraving on it, then feel free to clone-stamp out the text so that it is a balck grave stone. 2. Select the &#8220;type&#8221; tool. Choose &#8220;white&#8221; as your color. Type the words (creating a new type layer) that you want on the grave stone. 3. Right click and choose &#8220;rasterize type&#8221; for each of the &#8220;type&#8221; layers that you made in order to spell out what you wanted to be said on the grave stone. 4. Merge all the &#8220;type&#8221; layers into one layer. Call this merged layer of type as &#8220;White Text&#8221;. 5. Right click the &#8220;White Text&#8221; layer, choose Blending Options. 6. Select &#8220;Inner Shadow&#8221; option. Adjust the sliders and properties to the following: 7. You should have an engraved text effect on the grave stone. 8. Finally, changing the blending mode of the &#8220;White Text&#8221; layer to Soft Light. This will [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-969" title="gravestone06" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/gravestone06-150x150.jpg" alt="gravestone06" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>This tutorial is more for fun than anything else. As we walk through this tutorial, we&#8217;ll demonstrate how to take a grave or tomb stone and create text that looks as though it&#8217;s been engraved upon it.<br />
<span id="more-968"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open up a photo of a grave or tombstone. If the photo already has an engraving on it, then feel free to clone-stamp out the text so that it is a balck grave stone.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/grave-stone/gravestone01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. Select the &#8220;type&#8221; tool. Choose &#8220;white&#8221; as your color. Type the words (creating a new type layer) that you want on the grave stone.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/grave-stone/gravestone02.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Right click and choose &#8220;rasterize type&#8221; for each of the &#8220;type&#8221; layers that you made in order to spell out what you wanted to be said on the grave stone.</p>
<p>4. Merge all the &#8220;type&#8221; layers into one layer. Call this merged layer of type as &#8220;White Text&#8221;.</p>
<p>5. Right click the &#8220;White Text&#8221; layer, choose Blending Options.</p>
<p>6. Select &#8220;Inner Shadow&#8221; option. Adjust the sliders and properties to the following:</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/grave-stone/gravestone03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. You should have an engraved text effect on the grave stone.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/grave-stone/gravestone04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>8. Finally, changing the blending mode of the &#8220;White Text&#8221; layer to Soft Light. This will bring some of the underlying texture into the text.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/grave-stone/gravestone05.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>9. You should now have your final grave stone text.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/grave-stone/gravestone06.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/grave-stone-engraving/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Black &amp; White Face With Color – Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/black-white-color-face1/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/black-white-color-face1/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:29:22 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Black & White Face]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=965</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/black-white-color-face1/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/blackwhitecolor05-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="blackwhitecolor05" title="blackwhitecolor05" /></a>In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll learn how to take any photo and convert it into a black and white photo with splashes of color. This is a great technique for anyone who wants to add dynamic color effects and emphasize various features of a photograph. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open up a color image of a face in Photoshop, preferablly one where all the facial features are exposed. 2. Goto Layer &#62; Duplicate Layer&#8230; and when the popup appears, name the duplicate layer &#8220;Black White&#8221;. 3. Goto Image &#62; Adjustments &#62; Desaturate (or press CTRL+SHIFT+U). The &#8220;Black White&#8221; duplicate layer should turn black and white. 4. With the &#8220;Black White&#8221; layer active, select the Eraser tool. Select an appropriate brush size. Then zoom in and begin erasing the areas of the photo where you want the color to appear. 5. Continue to erase any other aspects of the photo until you have the final result that you are looking for. In this tutorial, I erased the lips and the hair from the &#8220;Black White&#8221; layer and the result is a black and white photo white the woman&#8217;s lips and hair in full color.]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-966" title="blackwhitecolor05" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/blackwhitecolor05-150x150.jpg" alt="blackwhitecolor05" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll learn how to take any photo and convert it into a black and white photo with splashes of color. This is a great technique for anyone who wants to add dynamic color effects and emphasize various features of a photograph.<br />
<span id="more-965"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open up a color image of a face in Photoshop, preferablly one where all the facial features are exposed.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/black-white-color-face/blackwhitecolor01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. Goto Layer &gt; Duplicate Layer&#8230; and when the popup appears, name the duplicate layer &#8220;Black White&#8221;.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/black-white-color-face/blackwhitecolor02.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Goto Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Desaturate (or press CTRL+SHIFT+U). The &#8220;Black White&#8221; duplicate layer should turn black and white.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/black-white-color-face/blackwhitecolor03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. With the &#8220;Black White&#8221; layer active, select the Eraser tool. Select an appropriate brush size. Then zoom in and begin erasing the areas of the photo where you want the color to appear.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/black-white-color-face/blackwhitecolor04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Continue to erase any other aspects of the photo until you have the final result that you are looking for. In this tutorial, I erased the lips and the hair from the &#8220;Black White&#8221; layer and the result is a black and white photo white the woman&#8217;s lips and hair in full color.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/black-white-color-face/blackwhitecolor05.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/black-white-color-face1/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Psychodelic/Crazy Looking Clouds</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/psychodeliccrazy-looking-clouds/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/psychodeliccrazy-looking-clouds/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:28:18 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Crazy Looking Clouds]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=962</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/psychodeliccrazy-looking-clouds/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/crazyclouds06-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="crazyclouds06" title="crazyclouds06" /></a>This tutorial will provide you with a fanatasy environment where the clouds are so obscure that they are without a doubt NOT from this world. The technique is great for science fiction style artowrk. Follow the tutorial below to learn how to do it: // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open up an image of a landscape in Photoshop, preferablly one where there is a horizon of clouds. 2. Be sure that this landscape image is on a new layer and name it &#8220;Landscape&#8221;. 3. Create another layer named &#8220;Crazy Clouds&#8221; just below the &#8220;Landsape&#8221; layer. Leave it blank. You will be adding content to this white, blank layer later in this tutorial. 4. Click the &#8220;Eye&#8221; icon next to the &#8220;Landscape&#8221; layer, so that it is no longer visible on your canvas. 5. Click on the &#8220;Crazy Clouds&#8221; layer so that it is active. 6. Make sure the foreground color is a &#8220;Dark Red&#8221; and the background color is &#8220;Black&#8221;. 7. Use the paint bucket to completely fill in the &#8220;Crazy Clouds&#8221; layer. 8. With the &#8220;Crazy Clouds&#8221; layer still selected, goto Filter &#62; Reverse &#62; Clouds. 9. The result should be a black and white cloud mixture. To enhance the [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-963" title="crazyclouds06" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/crazyclouds06-150x150.jpg" alt="crazyclouds06" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>This tutorial will provide you with a fanatasy environment where the clouds are so obscure that they are without a doubt NOT from this world. The technique is great for science fiction style artowrk. Follow the tutorial below to learn how to do it:<br />
<span id="more-962"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open up an image of a landscape in Photoshop, preferablly one where there is a horizon of clouds.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/crazy-clouds/crazyclouds01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. Be sure that this landscape image is on a new layer and name it &#8220;Landscape&#8221;.</p>
<p>3. Create another layer named &#8220;Crazy Clouds&#8221; just below the &#8220;Landsape&#8221; layer. Leave it blank. You will be adding content to this white, blank layer later in this tutorial.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/crazy-clouds/crazyclouds02.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. Click the &#8220;Eye&#8221; icon next to the &#8220;Landscape&#8221; layer, so that it is no longer visible on your canvas.</p>
<p>5. Click on the &#8220;Crazy Clouds&#8221; layer so that it is active.</p>
<p>6. Make sure the foreground color is a &#8220;Dark Red&#8221; and the background color is &#8220;Black&#8221;.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/crazy-clouds/crazyclouds03.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Use the paint bucket to completely fill in the &#8220;Crazy Clouds&#8221; layer.</p>
<p>8. With the &#8220;Crazy Clouds&#8221; layer still selected, goto Filter &gt; Reverse &gt; Clouds.</p>
<p>9. The result should be a black and white cloud mixture. To enhance the cloud effect, goto Filter &gt; Reverse &gt; Difference Clouds.</p>
<p>10. Still, the clouds need some additional adjustments. So goto Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Brightness/Contrast and djust the sliders so that the clouds appear pleasing to your satisfaction.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/crazy-clouds/crazyclouds04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>11. Click the &#8220;Eye&#8221; icon next to the &#8220;Landscape&#8221; layer so that it is visible again. Select the Eraser tool, zoom in close and begin erasing the clouds that are on the &#8220;Landscape&#8221; layer. As you erase, you will see the &#8220;Crazy Cloud&#8221; layer becoming visible from the layer below.</p>
<p>12. When you are done erasing all of the skyline from the &#8220;Landscape&#8221; layer, you should now have your finished image with the &#8220;Crazy Cloud&#8221; image as the skyline instead of the previous skyline from the &#8220;Landscpe&#8221; layer.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/crazy-clouds/crazyclouds05.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>13. As an additional option, to make the red clous blend better with the underlying landscape, you can use the hue/saturation feature in Photoshop. To do this, make sure the &#8220;Crazy Clouds&#8221; layer is active, then goto Images &gt; Adjustments &gt; Hue/Saturation. Adjust the Saturation slider so that it matches the landscape better.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/crazy-clouds/crazyclouds06.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/psychodeliccrazy-looking-clouds/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Change Heads</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/change-heads1/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/change-heads1/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:27:09 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Changing Heads]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=959</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/change-heads1/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/changeheads07-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="changeheads07" title="changeheads07" /></a>Changing someone&#8217;s head from one photograph to the body of another photograph can be a lot of fun. It&#8217;s such a popular technique that you sometimes even see businesses in malls and shopping centers charging money to take someone&#8217;s head and put it on a body builder or a swimsuit model. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll save you the money of having to pay for that. We&#8217;ll walk you through the steps of taking yours or someone else&#8217;s photo and putting it on another person&#8217;s body. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open the two photos that you will be using to swap heads. For the simplicity of this tutorial, we&#8217;ll refer to the two photos as follow: Body Photo: One photo that has the body you want to replace with a new head. Face Photo: The photo that has the face/head that you want to swap onto the Body Photo. 2. With the &#8220;Face Photo&#8221; selected, use the Lasso tool and draw a selection around the head. 3. Click CTRL+C to copy the head. 4. Paste the head onto the &#8220;Body Photo&#8221; by clicking CTRL+V. 5. Click CTRL+T to go into Tranform mode. Move and resize the head to fit proportionately over [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-960" title="changeheads07" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/changeheads07-150x150.jpg" alt="changeheads07" width="102" height="102" /></p>
<p>Changing someone&#8217;s head from one photograph to the body of another photograph can be a lot of fun. It&#8217;s such a popular technique that you sometimes even see businesses in malls and shopping centers charging money to take someone&#8217;s head and put it on a body builder or a swimsuit model. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll save you the money of having to pay for that. We&#8217;ll walk you through the steps of taking yours or someone else&#8217;s photo and putting it on another person&#8217;s body.<br />
<span id="more-959"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open the two photos that you will be using to swap heads. For the simplicity of this tutorial, we&#8217;ll refer to the two photos as follow:</p>
<p>Body Photo: One photo that has the body you want to replace with a new head.<br />
Face Photo:  The photo that has the face/head that you want to swap onto the Body Photo.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/change-heads/changeheads01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. With the &#8220;Face Photo&#8221; selected, use the Lasso tool and draw a selection around the head.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/change-heads/changeheads02.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Click CTRL+C to copy the head.</p>
<p>4. Paste the head onto the &#8220;Body Photo&#8221; by clicking CTRL+V.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/change-heads/changeheads03.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Click CTRL+T to go into Tranform mode. Move and resize the head to fit proportionately over the body.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/change-heads/changeheads04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. Make sure the layer with the &#8220;new head&#8221; is active. Select the eraser tool and begin erasing the surrounding background around the &#8220;new head&#8221;.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/change-heads/changeheads05.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Select the Clone Stamp Tool.</p>
<p>8. If you see in the image below, notice how the ear from the &#8220;old head&#8221; is showing from the layer beneath the &#8220;new head&#8221;. We need to get rid of this. So select the layer with the &#8220;old head&#8221; and begin to clone stamp out the areas of the &#8220;old head&#8221; underneath so that only the &#8220;new head&#8221; is visible.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/change-heads/changeheads06.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>9. Goto Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Hue/Saturation and adjust the saturation sliders. Do this for both layers so that both images match better. If the brightness levels of both photos are drastically different, then goto Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Brightness/Contrast and adjust the levels of the two layers so that they match better.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/change-heads/changeheads07.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/change-heads1/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>8</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Cloud Shapes</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/cloud-shapes/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/cloud-shapes/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:13:11 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Cloud Shapes]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=955</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/cloud-shapes/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/cloud-shape04-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="cloud-shape04" title="cloud-shape04" /></a>Maniputlaing clouds and changing their appearance can create some very spectacular effects. In this tutorial, well take a look at how to take a basic photo of clouds and manipulate the appearance into object, text, or whatever else you desire. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open up a cloud scene with a blue sky background in Photoshop. 2. In this tutorial, we are going to make the central cloud in the center to spell the word &#8220;Cloud&#8221;. 3. The first step is to utilize the Clone Stamp tool. You can find this tool in the toolbar. 4. The way the Clone Stamp tool works is that it allows you to copy other sections of the photograph and re-paste them anywhere else in the photograph. So to begin, select the Clone Stamp tool and make sure the brush size is large enough in proportion to the size of the photograph and the clouds. 5. In order to select some of the clouds to use for spellng out the word &#8220;Cloud&#8221;, hold your Clone Stamp cursor over a portion of the clouds. With your cursor over that cloud section, hold down the ALT key, then left mouse click the section. This will then [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-956" title="cloud-shape04" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/cloud-shape04-150x150.jpg" alt="cloud-shape04" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Maniputlaing clouds and changing their appearance can create some very spectacular effects. In this tutorial, well take a look at how to take a basic photo of clouds and manipulate the appearance into object, text, or whatever else you desire.<br />
<span id="more-955"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open up a cloud scene with a blue sky background in Photoshop.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/cloud-shapes/cloud-shape01.jpg" alt="" /><br />
2. In this tutorial, we are going to make the central cloud in the center to spell the word &#8220;Cloud&#8221;.</p>
<p>3. The first step is to utilize the Clone Stamp tool. You can find this tool in the toolbar.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/cloud-shapes/cloud-shape02.jpg" alt="" /><br />
4. The way the Clone Stamp tool works is that it allows you to copy other sections of the photograph and re-paste them anywhere else in the photograph. So to begin, select the Clone Stamp tool and make sure the brush size is large enough in proportion to the size of the photograph and the clouds.</p>
<p>5. In order to select some of the clouds to use for spellng out the word &#8220;Cloud&#8221;, hold your Clone Stamp cursor over a portion of the clouds. With your cursor over that cloud section, hold down the ALT key, then left mouse click the section. This will then copy that area of the cloud for you to use elsewhere in the photograph.</p>
<p>6. As you can see, I have pasted the copied cloud area from Step 5 and clicked (pasted) to the left side of the image, forming the letter &#8220;C&#8221; that is in the word &#8220;Cloud&#8221;.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/cloud-shapes/cloud-shape03.jpg" alt="" /><br />
7. Now I will begin following the same procedure in creating the rest of the letters. Keep in mind, that you can also use the Clone Stamp tool to copy and paste the blue sky portion of the photograph. Using the blue sky in your Clone Stamping can help remove the portions of the clouds that would otherwise obscure my spelling of the word &#8220;Cloud&#8221;.</p>
<p>8. Once you are done, you should achieve an accurate representation of the word &#8220;Cloud&#8221;. The possibilities of what you can do with this clone stamping technique are only limited by your imagination. If so inclined, you could manipulate the clouds to form a portrait of a face or perhaps create a logo for your company.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/cloud-shapes/cloud-shape04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/cloud-shapes/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Behind Window</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/behind-window/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/behind-window/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:12:24 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Behind Window]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=952</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/behind-window/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/behindwindow10-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="behindwindow10" title="behindwindow10" /></a>Adding a person to a photograph is a challenge, what&#8217;s even more of a challenge is adding a person behind glass. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll try to make it simple, by showing the steps that are required to take a photograph of a person and put them behind a window in another photograph. This tutorial is especially useful for learning to edit people into tricky environments. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open the two photos that you will be using. The photos will be named as follows: Person Photo: The photo of the person. Window Photo: The photo of the window. 2. First cut out the person in the &#8220;Person Photo&#8221; (for details on how to extract objects or people from their background, see the Cutting-Out tutorial). 3. Copy and paste the person onto the Window Photo. 4. Click Ctrl+T to go into Free Transform mode. Hold down the Shift key while using the corner shape handles to shrink the image so that it is proportionate to the window. 5. Select the Polygonal Lasso Tool. 6. Make sure that the layer with the window is the active layer. Select around the Person. 7. Click Ctrl+C to copy the selected area. 8. [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-953" title="behindwindow10" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/behindwindow10-150x150.jpg" alt="behindwindow10" width="100" height="100" /><br />
Adding a person to a photograph is a challenge, what&#8217;s even more of a challenge is adding a person behind glass. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll try to make it simple, by showing the steps that are required to take a photograph of a person and put them behind a window in another photograph. This tutorial is especially useful for learning to edit people into tricky environments.<br />
<span id="more-952"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open the two photos that you will be using. The photos will be named as follows:</p>
<p>Person Photo: The photo of the person.<br />
Window Photo:  The photo of the window.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/behind-window/behindwindow01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. First cut out the person in the &#8220;Person Photo&#8221; (for details on how to extract objects or people from their background, see the <a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/basic/cutting-out.php">Cutting-Out tutorial</a>).</p>
<p>3. Copy and paste the person onto the Window Photo.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/behind-window/behindwindow02.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. Click Ctrl+T to go into Free Transform mode. Hold down the Shift key while using the corner shape handles to shrink the image so that it is proportionate to the window.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/behind-window/behindwindow03.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Select the Polygonal Lasso Tool.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/behind-window/behindwindow04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. Make sure that the layer with the window is the active layer. Select around the Person.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/behind-window/behindwindow05.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Click Ctrl+C to copy the selected area.</p>
<p>8. Select the layer with the person on it to make it the active layer. Then click Ctrl+V to paste the window selection. This will paste the window into a new layer over the person (temporarily covering them up until Step 9).</p>
<p>9. Change the opacity of the new layer so that you can see the person underneath. Pay attention only to the window area to get an idea of how the person looks from behind the window.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/behind-window/behindwindow06.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/behind-window/behindwindow07.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>10. Select the layer with the person on it.</p>
<p>11. Select the Eraser tool.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/behind-window/behindwindow08.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>12. Zoom in and erase any part of the person that is showing over the frame of the window.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/behind-window/behindwindow09.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>13. When you have erased over all the frame area. You should now have what looks like a person behind the window.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/behind-window/behindwindow10.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/behind-window/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Navigation Arrow Bar</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/navigation-arrow-bar/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/navigation-arrow-bar/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:11:35 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Navigation Arrow Bar]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=949</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/navigation-arrow-bar/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/navigationarrows07-121x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="navigationarrows07" title="navigationarrows07" /></a>Having an up/down or left/right arrow navigation bar can be useful in websites where you want to allow users to scroll a section on your page. This could be a section of images, text, or any other web elements. It&#8217;s also useful as a way to go from one page link to the next (as in a book format). In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll learn how to make a simple up/down arrow bar. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open up a new document in Photoshop and create a new layer. Create a new layer and name it &#8220;Arrows&#8221;. 2. Select a color for your navigation arrows from the Swatches palette. 3. Select the Polygonal Tool. Make sure Fill Pixels is selected. Set the sides value to &#8220;3&#8243;. 4. Click and drag to make a triangle arrow. Use your mouse to rotate the triangle so that it is pointing up. 5. Select the Move tool. Hold down the ALT key and drag the arrow down to create a duplicate copy. 6. Goto Edit &#62; Transform &#62; Flip Vertical. The copied arrow should now be pointing down. 7. Click CTRL+E to merge together the copied arrow layer with the original &#8220;Arrows&#8221; layers. 8. Create [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-950" title="navigationarrows07" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/navigationarrows07-121x150.gif" alt="navigationarrows07" width="81" height="101" /></p>
<p>Having an up/down or left/right arrow navigation bar can be useful in websites where you want to allow users to scroll a section on your page. This could be a section of images, text, or any other web elements. It&#8217;s also useful as a way to go from one page link to the next (as in a book format). In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll learn how to make a simple up/down arrow bar.<br />
<span id="more-949"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open up a new document in Photoshop and create a new layer. Create a new layer and name it &#8220;Arrows&#8221;.</p>
<p>2. Select a color for your navigation arrows from the Swatches palette.</p>
<p>3. Select the Polygonal Tool. Make sure Fill Pixels is selected. Set the sides value to &#8220;3&#8243;.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/navigation/navigation-arrows/navigationarrows01.gif" alt="" /><br />
4. Click and drag to make a triangle arrow. Use your mouse to rotate the triangle so that it is pointing up.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/navigation/navigation-arrows/navigationarrows02.gif" alt="" /><br />
5. Select the Move tool. Hold down the ALT key and drag the arrow down to create a duplicate copy.</p>
<p>6. Goto Edit &gt; Transform &gt; Flip Vertical. The copied arrow should now be pointing down.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/navigation/navigation-arrows/navigationarrows03.gif" alt="" /><br />
7. Click CTRL+E to merge together the copied arrow layer with the original &#8220;Arrows&#8221; layers.</p>
<p>8. Create a new layer underneath the &#8220;Arrows&#8221; layer. Call this layer &#8220;Backdrop&#8221;.</p>
<p>9. Select the Rectangular Marquee tool. Create a rectangular selection for the backdrop of the arrows.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/navigation/navigation-arrows/navigationarrows04.gif" alt="" /><br />
10. Select the Paint Bucket tool and fill the selection with a color.</p>
<p>11. Right click the &#8220;Backdrop&#8221; layer, select &#8220;Blending Options&#8221; from the list.</p>
<p>12. Check off the &#8220;Bevel and Emboss&#8221; option. Adjust the Depth, Size, and Soften sliders until you are satisfied with the bevel appearance. Click OK to accept the changes.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/navigation/navigation-arrows/navigationarrows05.gif" alt="" /><br />
13. Right click the &#8220;Arrows&#8221; layer, select &#8220;Blending Options&#8221; from the list.</p>
<p>14. Check off the &#8220;Bevel and Emboss&#8221; checkbox. Adjust the Depth, Size, and Soften sliders until you are satisfied with the bevel appearance.</p>
<p>15. Next check off the &#8220;Drop Shadow&#8221; checkbox. Adjust the Opacity, Distance, Spread, and Size sliders until you are satisfied with the drop shadow effect.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/navigation/navigation-arrows/navigationarrows06.gif" alt="" /><br />
16. Create a new layer, inbetween the &#8220;Backdrop&#8221; layer and the &#8220;Arrows&#8221; layer. Call this new layer &#8220;Scroll&#8221;.</p>
<p>17. Select the Rectangular Marquee tool. Create a rectangular selection that connects both arrows.</p>
<p>18. Use the Paint Bucket tool and fill the selection with any color you wish.</p>
<p>19. Right click the &#8220;Scroll&#8221; layer, select &#8220;Blending Options&#8221; from the list.</p>
<p>20. Check off the &#8220;Inner Shadow&#8221; checkbox. Adjust the Opacity, Distance, Choke, and Size sliders until you are satisfied with the inner shadow effect.</p>
<p>21. You should now be done with your Up/Down arrow bar.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/navigation/navigation-arrows/navigationarrows07.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/navigation-arrow-bar/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Button Dividers</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/button-dividers/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/button-dividers/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:10:46 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Button Dividers]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=946</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/button-dividers/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/buttondivider07-150x46.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="buttondivider07" title="buttondivider07" /></a>Button dividers are a great way to separate the links in a navigation bar. This helps eliminate the confusion of two links looking as if they belong to the same hyperlink. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll demonstrate how to create a very simple button dvider so as to eliminate this confusion and therefore make the navigation bar more intuitive and user-friendly. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open up a new document in Photoshop and create a new layer. Name this layer &#8220;Navbar&#8221;. 2. Be sure that the size of the canvas is long in length, similar to a standard navigation bar.. (See below:) 3. Using the Rectangular Marquee Tool, create a long rectangular selection for your navigation bar. 4. With the Paint Bucket tool, fill in the selected area with your choice of color. 5. Next, let&#8217;s give the navigation bar a 3D effect to give it some extra pizzaz. To do this, right click the &#8220;Nav Bar&#8221; layer and click on &#8220;Blending Options&#8230;&#8221; from the drop down box. 6. When the Layer Style pop-up box appears, click on &#8220;Bevel and Emboss&#8221; feature. Feel free to adjust the settings of the Depth, Size, and Soften attributes to give your navigation bar the [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-947" title="buttondivider07" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/buttondivider07-150x46.gif" alt="buttondivider07" width="102" height="31" /></p>
<p>Button dividers are a great way to separate the links in a navigation bar. This helps eliminate the confusion of two links looking as if they belong to the same hyperlink. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll demonstrate how to create a very simple button dvider so as to eliminate this confusion and therefore make the navigation bar more intuitive and user-friendly.<br />
<span id="more-946"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open up a new document in Photoshop and create a new layer. Name this layer &#8220;Navbar&#8221;.</p>
<p>2. Be sure that the size of the canvas is long in length, similar to a standard navigation bar.. (See below:)</p>
<p>3. Using the Rectangular Marquee Tool, create a long rectangular selection for your navigation bar.</p>
<p>4. With the Paint Bucket tool, fill in the selected area with your choice of color.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/navigation/button-dividers/buttondivider01.gif" alt="" /><br />
5. Next, let&#8217;s give the navigation bar a 3D effect to give it some extra pizzaz. To do this, right click the &#8220;Nav Bar&#8221; layer and click on &#8220;Blending Options&#8230;&#8221; from the drop down box.</p>
<p>6. When the Layer Style pop-up box appears, click on &#8220;Bevel and Emboss&#8221; feature. Feel free to adjust the settings of the Depth, Size, and Soften attributes to give your navigation bar the effect that you want. When you are satisified with the effect, click &#8220;OK&#8221; to make the changes.</p>
<p>7. Your navigation bar should now look like the following:</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/navigation/button-dividers/buttondivider02.gif" alt="" /><br />
8. Select the Text tool and type the standard navigation links that you might find on a typical navigation bar.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/navigation/button-dividers/buttondivider03.gif" alt="" /><br />
9. Now here is where we add the Button Dividers. Begin by selecting the Rectangualr Marquee tool.</p>
<p>10. Create a new layer above all other layers and name it &#8220;Button Divider&#8221;.</p>
<p>11. Zoom in closely between the &#8220;Home&#8221; and the &#8220;Contact&#8221; links. Then create a very thin verticle rectuangluar selection from the very top of the navigation bar to the bottom. Make sure the rectangular selection is exactly between the two link texts.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/navigation/button-dividers/buttondivider04.gif" alt="" /><br />
12. Now with the &#8220;Button Divider&#8221; still active, fill inthe selection with a dark color (to represent the shadow).</p>
<p>13. Now follow steps 11 and 12, except slightly move the rectangualr selection to the right. Use the paint pucket tool to fill in the selection with a lighter color (to represent the highlight).</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/navigation/button-dividers/buttondivider05.gif" alt="" /><br />
14. Zoom back out and you will see the Button Divider in your navigation bar.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/navigation/button-dividers/buttondivider06.gif" alt="" /><br />
15. Now all you have to do is copy/paste the Button Divider layer and paste it inbetween each of the other text links as so:</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/navigation/button-dividers/buttondivider07.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/button-dividers/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Section Container</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/section-container/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/section-container/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:09:44 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[interface]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Section Container]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=943</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/section-container/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/sectioncontainer06-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="sectioncontainer06" title="sectioncontainer06" /></a>Oftentimes, we need some way to structurize our website so that certain text or objects have a container the separate it from other content on the site. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll create a container for content in a website. I find that by using these little containers, it helps bring greater organization to a website and your visitors will know which parts are separated into their own categories. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open a new document in Photoshop. Create a new layer. Call it &#8220;Section Container&#8221;. 2. Use the Rectangular Marquee tool to create a squarish shape for your container. Fill the selection in with a color of your choice. 3. Goto Select &#62; Modify &#62; Contract. Enter in a value for the width in pixels that you would like the border for your section container to be. Click OK. 4. Your selection should now have moved in a bit. Click the Delete key and you should now have a border for your Section Box. 5. Next, we need to create the header for the Section Container. Add a new layer that is above the &#8220;Section Container&#8221; layer. Name this new layer &#8220;Category Bar&#8221;. 6. Use the Rectangular Marquee tool [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-944" title="sectioncontainer06" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/sectioncontainer06-150x150.gif" alt="sectioncontainer06" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Oftentimes, we need some way to structurize our website so that certain text or objects have a container the separate it from other content on the site. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll create a container for content in a website. I find that by using these little containers, it helps bring greater organization to a website and your visitors will know which parts are separated into their own categories.<br />
<span id="more-943"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open a new document in Photoshop. Create a new layer. Call it &#8220;Section Container&#8221;.</p>
<p>2. Use the Rectangular Marquee tool to create a squarish shape for your container. Fill the selection in with a color of your choice.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/interfaces/section-container/sectioncontainer01.gif" alt="" /><br />
3. Goto Select &gt; Modify &gt; Contract. Enter in a value for the width in pixels that you would like the border for your section container to be. Click OK.</p>
<p>4. Your selection should now have moved in a bit. Click the Delete key and you should now have a border for your Section Box.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/interfaces/section-container/sectioncontainer02.gif" alt="" /><br />
5. Next, we need to create the header for the Section Container. Add a new layer that is above the &#8220;Section Container&#8221; layer. Name this new layer &#8220;Category Bar&#8221;.</p>
<p>6. Use the Rectangular Marquee tool and create a rectangular box over the top border of your Section Container.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/interfaces/section-container/sectioncontainer03.gif" alt="" /><br />
7. Now fill in this box with a color of your choice.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/interfaces/section-container/sectioncontainer04.gif" alt="" /><br />
8. Right click the &#8220;Category Bar&#8221; layer and select &#8220;Blending Properties&#8221;.</p>
<p>9. When the blending properties box opens, select &#8220;Bevel and Emboss&#8221;. Change the Depth, Size, and Soften sliders so that the header is not too rounded and appears more like a button. Click OK to close &#8220;Blending Properties&#8221;. I like my category bar to look flat like the one below so that the text fits flatly over it.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/interfaces/section-container/sectioncontainer05.gif" alt="" /><br />
10. Then select the Type Tool and enter your text over the &#8220;Category Bar&#8221;.</p>
<p>11. That&#8217;s about it. If you want, you can add another layer beneath the &#8220;Selection Container&#8221; layer and paste a background image or texture. When you are done, just slice the box so that it can be used in your HTML website.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/interfaces/section-container/sectioncontainer06.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/section-container/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Logo Corner Piece</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/logo-corner-piece/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/logo-corner-piece/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:08:50 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[interface]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=940</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/logo-corner-piece/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/logocornerpiece07-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="logocornerpiece07" title="logocornerpiece07" /></a>In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll take a look at how to create a neat little corner piece element for your website. I find that these are great for holding your logo or title of your website in the upper left corner where your website Header is. In addition to looking flashy, they are also a great way to bring attention to your product name and identity. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open a new document in Photoshop. Create a new layer called &#8220;Corner Piece&#8221; on top of the Background layer. 2. Use the Polygonal Lasso tool and create the shape for your Corner Piece. When you close your shape, it will convert to a selection. (I use the Polygonal Lasso tool just for making this tutorial easier. Feel free to substitute and use the pen tool to make your shape if you know how.) 3. Goto Select &#62; Modify &#62; Smooth from the main menu. 4. The Smooth box appears for you to enter a value. Depending on how smooth you want your Corner Piece shape, enter the value here and click OK. I used 30 to make sure the shape was smooth. 5. Next, fill in the selection with a color [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-941" title="logocornerpiece07" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/logocornerpiece07-150x150.gif" alt="logocornerpiece07" width="101" height="101" /></p>
<p>In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll take a look at how to create a neat little corner piece element for your website. I find that these are great for holding your logo or title of your website in the upper left corner where your website Header is. In addition to looking flashy, they are also a great way to bring attention to your product name and identity.<br />
<span id="more-940"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open a new document in Photoshop. Create a new layer called &#8220;Corner Piece&#8221; on top of the Background layer.</p>
<p>2. Use the Polygonal Lasso tool and create the shape for your Corner Piece. When you close your shape, it will convert to a selection. (I use the Polygonal Lasso tool just for making this tutorial easier. Feel free to substitute and use the pen tool to make your shape if you know how.)</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/interfaces/logo-corner-piece/logocornerpiece01.gif" alt="" /><br />
3. Goto Select &gt; Modify &gt; Smooth from the main menu.</p>
<p>4. The Smooth box appears for you to enter a value. Depending on how smooth you want your Corner Piece shape, enter the value here and click OK. I used 30 to make sure the shape was smooth.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/interfaces/logo-corner-piece/logocornerpiece02.gif" alt="" /><br />
5. Next, fill in the selection with a color of your choice using the Paint Bucket tool.</p>
<p>6. Use the Polygonal Lasso tool to create another selection within your colored Corner Piece shape. Follow the procedure in Steps 3 and 4 to smooth out the selection.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/interfaces/logo-corner-piece/logocornerpiece03.gif" alt="" /><br />
7. Now hit the Delete key to erase the color from the center of the object.</p>
<p>8. Next, right click the &#8220;Corner Piece&#8221; layer from the layers palette and select &#8220;Blending Options&#8221;.</p>
<p>9. The Blending Options box will open. Click the checkbox next to Bevel and Emboss. Adjust the Depth, Size, and Soften sliders under the Bevel &amp; Emboss section so that you give the Corner Piece a 3D effect.</p>
<p>10. Now, with the Blending Options box still open, click the checkbox next to Shadow and give the Corner piece a shadow. Adjust the Opacity, Angle, Distance, Spread, and Size sliders until you are happy with the appearance. Click OK to accept changes and exit out of the Blending Options box. Your image should look something like below:</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/interfaces/logo-corner-piece/logocornerpiece04.gif" alt="" /><br />
11. Lastly, we should bring in our logo to place inside. To do this, create a new layer, but make sure the layer is below the &#8220;Corner Piece&#8221; layer. Call this new layer &#8220;Logo&#8221;.</p>
<p>12. Simply paste your logo and position it in a good spot inside the Corner Piece.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/interfaces/logo-corner-piece/logocornerpiece05.gif" alt="" /><br />
13. To erase any excess image that is coming out from behind the Corner Piece, you can use the eraser tool to erase it. Then you will have your final &#8220;Logo Corner Piece&#8221; image.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/interfaces/logo-corner-piece/logocornerpiece06.gif" alt="" /><br />
14. I added some text to fill in the top right area. This is the final result.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/interfaces/logo-corner-piece/logocornerpiece07.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/logo-corner-piece/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Text Over Image Collage &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/text-over-image-collage-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/text-over-image-collage-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:07:49 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Image Collage]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Text Over]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=937</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/text-over-image-collage-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/textblockoverimage05-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="textblockoverimage05" title="textblockoverimage05" /></a>When it comes to developing a graphic design piece or an informative presentation on a given topic, then the Text over Image tutorial listed here is a great way to asthetically express the information you want to show to your visitors. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll show you how to add a transparent text block over an image that is graphically pleasing to the visitor&#8217;s eyes. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open a new photograph in Photoshop. A photograph of a topic that you wish to provide factual information about. 2. Create a new layer, name it &#8220;Text Block&#8221;. 3. Select the Rectangular Marquee tool and create a box for yoru text over the photograph in an area that doesn&#8217;t obscure the main focus of the image in the background photo (in this case, being the frog). 4. Use the paint bursh tool and fill in this box selection with &#8220;White&#8221;. 5. Press CTRL+D to deselect the selection. 6. Change the opacity fo the &#8220;Text Block&#8221; layer so that you can see some of the background image shining through. 7. Select the Type tool. Set the color for the text to your preference. Then type out the text that describes the photo. [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-938" title="textblockoverimage05" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/textblockoverimage05-150x150.jpg" alt="textblockoverimage05" width="100" height="100" /><br />
When it comes to developing a graphic design piece or an informative presentation on a given topic, then the Text over Image tutorial listed here is a great way to asthetically express the information you want to show to your visitors. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll show you how to add a transparent text block over an image that is graphically pleasing to the visitor&#8217;s eyes.<br />
<span id="more-937"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-2548979619548338";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
google_ad_format = "336x280_as";
google_ad_type = "text";
google_ad_channel = "";
google_color_border = "FFFFFF";
google_color_bg = "FFFFFF";
google_color_link = "090964";
google_color_text = "6e7fb8";
google_color_url = "a1a9c5";
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong><a id="Y6997757S7" style="color: #0b1e68; text-decoration: underline;" href="javascript:void(0);">Step</a>-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open a new photograph in <a id="Y6997757S3" style="color: #0b1e68; text-decoration: underline;" href="javascript:void(0);">Photoshop</a>. A photograph of a topic that you wish to provide factual information about.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/text-over-image/textblockoverimage01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. Create a new layer, name it &#8220;Text Block&#8221;.</p>
<p>3. Select the Rectangular Marquee tool and create a box for yoru text over the photograph in an area that doesn&#8217;t obscure the main focus of the image in the <a id="Y6997757S5" style="color: #0b1e68; text-decoration: underline;" href="javascript:void(0);">background</a> photo (in this case, being the frog).</p>
<p>4. Use the paint bursh tool and fill in this box selection with &#8220;White&#8221;.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/text-over-image/textblockoverimage02.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Press CTRL+D to deselect the selection.</p>
<p>6. Change the opacity fo the &#8220;Text Block&#8221; layer so that you can see some of the background image shining through.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/text-over-image/textblockoverimage03.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Select the Type tool. Set the color for the text to your preference. Then type out the text that describes the photo.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/text-over-image/textblockoverimage04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>8. Make sure the &#8220;Text Block&#8221; layer is again the <a id="Y6997757S9" style="color: #0b1e68; text-decoration: underline;" href="javascript:void(0);">active</a> layer. Right click the &#8220;Text Block&#8221; layer, then choose &#8220;Blending Options&#8221;.</p>
<p>9. When the &#8220;Blending Options&#8221; <a id="Y6997757S8" style="color: #0b1e68; text-decoration: underline;" href="javascript:void(0);">pop</a>-up appears, adjust the properties under &#8220;Drop <a id="Y6997757S4" style="color: #0b1e68; text-decoration: underline;" href="javascript:void(0);">Shadow</a>&#8221; to add a nice shadow to the white background box of the &#8220;Text Block&#8221; layer. Adjust the sliders to get the effective shadow you are satisified with.</p>
<p>10. Congrats! You should now have your transparent text block over your background image.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/text-over-image/textblockoverimage05.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/text-over-image-collage-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Logo With Aqua Background &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/logo-with-aqua-background-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/logo-with-aqua-background-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:06:48 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Aqua Background]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=934</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/logo-with-aqua-background-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/logowithaquabackground12-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="logowithaquabackground12" title="logowithaquabackground12" /></a>Here is an interesting tutorial on how to create a logo with an aqua background. This is a great tutorial for inspiring one&#8217;s creativity. Keep in mind that the aqua color of this logo can also be changed by adjusting the Hue/Saturation level sliders under Image &#62; Adjustments &#62; Hue Staturation (from the main menu in Photoshop). // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Create a new file of 500 x 500 pixel wide. 2. Create a new layer by pressing shift+ctrl+n together. 3. Select Elliptical Marquee tool and draw a circle in the middle of the canvas. 4. Select #A2F3FF as foreground color and fill it with gradiant Fill. 5. Keep the selection active and press shift+ctrl+n again to create a new layer and group it with the previous layer. 6. Now move the selection like shown in figure. 7. Press D to change colors to default and press x to select white as foreground color. Fill this selection with foreground to transparent color. 8. Press ctrl+d to deselect. Press Ctrl+J to duplicate the layer and rotate this layer to left side of the circle. Again press Ctrl+J to duplicate the layer and rotate it to the bottom of the circle. Repeat [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-935" title="logowithaquabackground12" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/logowithaquabackground12-150x150.gif" alt="logowithaquabackground12" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Here is an interesting tutorial on how to create a logo with an aqua background. This is a great tutorial for inspiring one&#8217;s creativity. Keep in mind that the aqua color of this logo can also be changed by adjusting the Hue/Saturation level sliders under Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Hue Staturation (from the main menu in Photoshop).<span id="more-934"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1.	Create a new file of 500 x 500 pixel wide. 2.	Create a new layer by pressing shift+ctrl+n together. 3.	Select Elliptical Marquee tool and draw a circle in the middle of the canvas. 4.	Select #A2F3FF as foreground color and fill it with gradiant Fill.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/logo-aqua-background/logowithaquabackground01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>5.	Keep the selection active and press shift+ctrl+n again to create a new layer and group it with the previous layer. 6.	Now move the selection like shown in figure.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/logo-aqua-background/logowithaquabackground02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Press D to change colors to default and press x to select white as foreground color. Fill this selection with foreground to transparent color.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/logo-aqua-background/logowithaquabackground03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>8. Press ctrl+d to deselect. Press Ctrl+J to duplicate the layer and rotate this layer to left side of the circle. Again press Ctrl+J to duplicate the layer and rotate it to the bottom of the circle. Repeat this step for one more time and move the layer to the right of the circle. 9. Now select the base layer and select blending option &gt;stroke = 1 pixel and color to dark blue. 10. Group and merge all the layers.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/logo-aqua-background/logowithaquabackground04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>11. Now create a new layer and draw a circle bigger than the base layer and fill it with dark gray color(#999797). 12. Now give these settings to gray colored layer.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/logo-aqua-background/logowithaquabackground05.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/logo-aqua-background/logowithaquabackground06.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/logo-aqua-background/logowithaquabackground07.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>Your image should look like this.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/logo-aqua-background/logowithaquabackground08.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>13. Now duplicate this layer and move it like shown in the figure. Give opacity to 50%.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/logo-aqua-background/logowithaquabackground09.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>14. Again duplicate this layer and move it to the right direction.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/logo-aqua-background/logowithaquabackground10.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>15. Now click on the base layer which we created earlier and press shift+ctrl+} to bring it to front.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/logo-aqua-background/logowithaquabackground11.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>16. Our base area is ready. Now add your text and your new logo is ready.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/logo-aqua-background/logowithaquabackground12.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/logo-with-aqua-background-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Basic Logo Design &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/basic-logo-design-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/basic-logo-design-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:05:51 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Logo Design]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=931</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/basic-logo-design-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/basiclogodesign09-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="basiclogodesign09" title="basiclogodesign09" /></a>Sometimes we get designers block when it comes to creating a new logo design. Here is a great tutorial with some techniques that may assist you in developing your own logo. Through the use of various photoshop tools, we&#8217;ll walk you through a simple logo design. Feel free to throw a spin on it and make it unique if you want. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Create a new file of your choice. 2. Create a new layer by pressing shift+ctrl+n together. 3. Select Elliptical Marquee tool and draw a circle in the center of the canvas and fill it with black color by pressing ctrl+backspace. 4. Keep the selection active and move the selection by pressing right arrow key for 7 times. 5. Now press delete. You should have figure like shown in the picture. 6. Press Ctrl+j to duplicate the layer and press shift+ctrl+right arrow key to move the new layer to 10 pixels. Repeat this step for one more time. 7. Now group and merge the layers. 8. Press Ctrl+T to transform the layer and rotate the layer like shown in the figure and press enter. 9. Your image should look like this. 10. Now remove the lower [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-932" title="basiclogodesign09" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/basiclogodesign09-150x150.gif" alt="basiclogodesign09" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Sometimes we get designers block when it comes to creating a new logo design. Here is a great tutorial with some techniques that may assist you in developing your own logo. Through the use of various photoshop tools, we&#8217;ll walk you through a simple logo design. Feel free to throw a spin on it and make it unique if you want.<br />
<span id="more-931"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1.	Create a new file of your choice.</p>
<p>2.	Create a new layer by pressing shift+ctrl+n together.</p>
<p>3. Select Elliptical Marquee tool and draw a circle in the center of the canvas and fill it with black color by pressing ctrl+backspace.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/basic-logo-design/basiclogodesign01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>4.	Keep the selection active and move the selection by pressing right arrow key for 7 times.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/basic-logo-design/basiclogodesign02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Now press delete. You should have figure like shown in the picture.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/basic-logo-design/basiclogodesign03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. Press Ctrl+j to duplicate the layer and press shift+ctrl+right arrow key to move the new layer to 10 pixels. Repeat this step for one more time.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/basic-logo-design/basiclogodesign04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Now group and merge the layers.</p>
<p>8. Press Ctrl+T to transform the layer and rotate the layer like shown in the figure and press enter.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/basic-logo-design/basiclogodesign05.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>9. Your image should look like this.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/basic-logo-design/basiclogodesign06.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>10. Now remove the lower portion of the image.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/basic-logo-design/basiclogodesign07.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>11. Duplicate this layer by pressing ctrl+j, transform it horizontally (edit&gt;transform&gt;horizontal) and move this duplicate layer like shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/basic-logo-design/basiclogodesign08.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>12. Hands are ready. If you want than you can experiment with different custom shapes and add some text below these hands.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/basic-logo-design/basiclogodesign09.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/basic-logo-design-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Creating a Cold Cream Jar &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/creating-a-cold-cream-jar-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/creating-a-cold-cream-jar-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:04:59 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Cream Jar]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=928</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/creating-a-cold-cream-jar-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/coldcream08-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="coldcream08" title="coldcream08" /></a>Here is a great tutorial for any graphic design artists that would like to create a jar for any type of product that they are selling or promoting. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through the step-by-step process of developing a jar of cold cream. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Create a new file. Create a new layer and draw a shape with the help of pen tool like shown in the figure. 2. Duplicate this layer and rotate it to have a shape like shown below and merge them by grouping them first and pressing ctrl+e. Now draw little circle below the base of the image. 3. Right click on its layer name, select blending options. Select color overlay and set color to white. Now, select inner shadow, change the color to #D9E3E5. Give the values like shown in the figure. 4. Now, we want to add a lid to the image. For that, first create a new layer by pressing shift+ctrl+n. Select Rectangular Marquee Tool to draw a rectangle and fill it with # 8EE8CC like shown in the figure. 5. Create another layer, draw a circle over the rectangle layer and fill it with #8EE8CC. Duplicate this layer by [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-929" title="coldcream08" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/coldcream08-150x150.gif" alt="coldcream08" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Here is a great tutorial for any graphic design artists that would like to create a jar for any type of product that they are selling or promoting. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through the step-by-step process of developing a jar of cold cream.<br />
<span id="more-928"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1.	Create a new file. Create a new layer and draw a shape with the help of pen tool like shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/cold-cream/coldcream01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. Duplicate this layer and rotate it to have a shape like shown below and merge them by grouping them first and pressing ctrl+e. Now draw little circle below the base of the image.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/cold-cream/coldcream02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Right click on its layer name, select blending options. Select color overlay and set color to white. Now, select inner shadow, change the color to #D9E3E5. Give the values like shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/cold-cream/coldcream03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. Now, we want to add a lid to the image. For that, first create a new layer by pressing shift+ctrl+n. Select Rectangular Marquee Tool to draw a rectangle and fill it with # 8EE8CC like shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/cold-cream/coldcream04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Create another layer, draw a circle over the rectangle layer and fill it with #8EE8CC. Duplicate this layer by pressing ctrl+j and move it just below the rectangle shape.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/cold-cream/coldcream05.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. Select the top circle layer by right clicking on its name on the layer pallet. Now select add a little inner glow in it. Select this layer again by control clicking on its name. Go to select&gt;modify&gt;contract. Contract it 2 pixels. Keep the selection active and create a new layer. Fill it with #AFFEEB and reduce its opacity by either moving the slider to 56% or quickly typing 56 from your numeric key pad.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/cold-cream/coldcream06.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>7.	Add little drop shadow in the layer which we duplicated in step 5. You should have image like shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/cold-cream/coldcream07.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>8.	Our image is ready. Add some text in it.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/graphic-design/cold-cream/coldcream08.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/creating-a-cold-cream-jar-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Smoke Shapes</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/smoke-shapes/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/smoke-shapes/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:03:55 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Smoke Shapes]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=925</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/smoke-shapes/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/smoke_shapes04-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="smoke_shapes04" title="smoke_shapes04" /></a>Did you ever want to create the illusion of smoke in your photoshop artwork. There are many tutorials out there on creating smoke, but what I like most about this technique is that it provides the artist with full control over how the smoke behaves. This technique allows you to create any shape you want with the smoke (rather than relying on the random effects of filters). // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open up an image in photoshop that you wish to apply smoke to. 2. Create a new layer. Name it &#8220;Smoke&#8221;. 3. With the Smoke layer selected, use the paintbrush tool to draw some white areas for the smoke. We&#8217;ll tweak these white paint brush marks later to look like smoke. 4. Now select the Smudge tool and set the &#8220;Strength&#8221; settings to 50%. Begin smudging the white areas to make them appear more like smoke. 5. Once you&#8217;ve smudged the smoke into the shapes that you find pleasing, select the Eraser tool. Set the Opacity settings to 40%. Then begin applying the eraser to the areas of the smoke that need to be lightened. 6. Congratulations! You should now have your smoke in the exact shape you wanted. [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-926" title="smoke_shapes04" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/smoke_shapes04-150x150.jpg" alt="smoke_shapes04" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Did you ever want to create the illusion of smoke in your photoshop artwork. There are many tutorials out there on creating smoke, but what I like most about this technique is that it provides the artist with full control over how the smoke behaves. This technique allows you to create any shape you want with the smoke (rather than relying on the random effects of filters).<span id="more-925"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open up an image in photoshop that you wish to apply smoke to.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/effects/smoke-shapes/smoke_shapes01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. Create a new layer. Name it &#8220;Smoke&#8221;.</p>
<p>3. With the Smoke layer selected, use the paintbrush tool to draw some white areas for the smoke. We&#8217;ll tweak these white paint brush marks later to look like smoke.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/effects/smoke-shapes/smoke_shapes02.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. Now select the Smudge tool and set the &#8220;Strength&#8221; settings to 50%. Begin smudging the white areas to make them appear more like smoke.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/effects/smoke-shapes/smoke_shapes03.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Once you&#8217;ve smudged the smoke into the shapes that you find pleasing, select the Eraser tool. Set the Opacity settings to 40%. Then begin applying the eraser to the areas of the smoke that need to be lightened.</p>
<p>6. Congratulations! You should now have your smoke in the exact shape you wanted. Try it again, but experiment by Effects faces with the paintbrush in Step 3.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/effects/smoke-shapes/smoke_shapes04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/smoke-shapes/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Reflective Surfaces</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/reflective-surfaces/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/reflective-surfaces/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:03:04 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[effects]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Reflective Surfaces]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=922</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/reflective-surfaces/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/reflective_surface07-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="reflective_surface07" title="reflective_surface07" /></a>Creating reflective surfaces can instantly bring appeal to any object. This photoshop tutorial will show you how to add a reflective surface. What&#8217;s even better is that it can be used on objects or on text. The choice is up to you. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open up a new document in Photoshop. Make sure the size of the canvas is big enough to hold your object and the reflection below it. 2. Create a new layer. Name it &#8220;Object&#8221; and paste the object onto the &#8220;Object&#8221; layer. For the purposes of this tutorial, we are using an ornament. 3. Create another new layer. Name it &#8220;Reflection&#8221; and paste the same object into the &#8220;Reflection&#8221; layer. 4. With the Reflection layer selected, goto Edit &#62; Transform &#62; Flip Vertical (from the main menu). 5. Now goto Edit &#62; Transform &#62; Perspective. 6. The shape handles should appear around the reflection object to indicate you are in &#8220;Perspective&#8221; mode. Begin tweaking your object&#8217;s perspective by clicking and dragging the bottom right shape handle to the left. This will cause the object to have the affect that it is coming out toward the viewer. 7. Hit the Enter key to exit &#8220;Perspective&#8221; [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-923" title="reflective_surface07" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/reflective_surface07-150x150.jpg" alt="reflective_surface07" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Creating reflective surfaces can instantly bring appeal to any object. This photoshop tutorial will show you how to add a reflective surface. What&#8217;s even better is that it can be used on objects or on text. The choice is up to you.<br />
<span id="more-922"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open up a new document in Photoshop. Make sure the size of the canvas is big enough to hold your object and the reflection below it.</p>
<p>2. Create a new layer. Name it &#8220;Object&#8221; and paste the object onto the &#8220;Object&#8221; layer. For the purposes of this tutorial, we are using an ornament.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/effects/reflective-surface/reflective_surface01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Create another new layer. Name it &#8220;Reflection&#8221; and paste the same object into the &#8220;Reflection&#8221; layer.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/effects/reflective-surface/reflective_surface02.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. With the Reflection layer selected, goto Edit &gt; Transform &gt; Flip Vertical (from the main menu).</p>
<p>5. Now goto Edit &gt; Transform &gt; Perspective.</p>
<p>6. The shape handles should appear around the reflection object to indicate you are in &#8220;Perspective&#8221; mode. Begin tweaking your object&#8217;s perspective by clicking and dragging the bottom right shape handle to the left. This will cause the object to have the affect that it is coming out toward the viewer.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/effects/reflective-surface/reflective_surface03.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Hit the Enter key to exit &#8220;Perspective&#8221; mode and apply the changes you have made.</p>
<p>8. Add a layer mask to the &#8220;Reflection&#8221; layer.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/effects/reflective-surface/reflective_surface04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>9. Apply a black to white gradient to the mask.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/effects/reflective-surface/reflective_surface05.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>10. Hold the shift key while applying the gradient to keep the line straight. Go from bottom to up.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/effects/reflective-surface/reflective_surface06.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>11. You should now have your reflective surface.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/effects/reflective-surface/reflective_surface07.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/reflective-surfaces/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Vector Effects</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/vector-effects/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/vector-effects/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 23:02:00 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Vector Effects]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=919</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/vector-effects/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/vectoreffect04-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="vectoreffect04" title="vectoreffect04" /></a>Here is a fun tutorial that shows how to take any photograph and apply a vector effect to it so that it appears as if it were made in Illustrator, Flash, or any other vector based Effects program. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open up the photograph that you want to vectorize in Photoshop. 2. Goto Filter &#62; Artistic &#62; Cutout. 3. Adjust the sliders until you get the vector effect that you want. 4. When you are done, you should have a cool looking vectorized image.]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-920" title="vectoreffect04" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/vectoreffect04-150x150.jpg" alt="vectoreffect04" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Here is a fun tutorial that shows how to take any photograph and apply a vector effect to it so that it appears as if it were made in Illustrator, Flash, or any other vector based Effects program.<span id="more-919"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open up the photograph that you want to vectorize in Photoshop.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/effects/vector-effects/vectoreffect01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. Goto Filter &gt; Artistic &gt; Cutout.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/effects/vector-effects/vectoreffect02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Adjust the sliders until you get the vector effect that you want.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/effects/vector-effects/vectoreffect03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. When you are done, you should have a cool looking vectorized image.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/effects/vector-effects/vectoreffect04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/vector-effects/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Random Designs &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/random-designs-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/random-designs-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 22:25:05 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Random Designs]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=916</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/random-designs-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/randomdesigns03-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="randomdesigns03" title="randomdesigns03" /></a>This tutorial is a great way to come up with all kinds of random and archaic designs to use in your graphic design projects. The best part is that it is a very simple tutorial. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open a new document in Photoshop. 2. Select the Rectangle Tool. 3. Choose any color you want from the Swatches palette. 4. Now begin drawing different types of squares and rectangles all over your canvas. 5. When you are done, goto Filter &#62; Distort &#62; Polar Coordinates. 6. The Polar Coordinates pop-up will appear. Click the &#8220;Rectangular to Polar&#8221; radio button. Then click OK to accept. 7. What you should now have is a custom random design. 8. Try this tutorial over and over by placing your rectangles and boxes from step 4 in different areas and different placements. This will give you all kinds of different random designs.]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-917" title="randomdesigns03" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/randomdesigns03-150x150.gif" alt="randomdesigns03" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>This tutorial is a great way to come up with all kinds of random and archaic designs to use in your graphic design projects. The best part is that it is a very simple tutorial.<span id="more-916"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open a new document in Photoshop.</p>
<p>2. Select the Rectangle Tool.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/random-designs/randomdesigns01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Choose any color you want from the Swatches palette.</p>
<p>4. Now begin drawing different types of squares and rectangles all over your canvas.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/random-designs/randomdesigns02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. When you are done, goto Filter &gt; Distort &gt; Polar Coordinates.</p>
<p>6. The Polar Coordinates pop-up will appear. Click the &#8220;Rectangular to Polar&#8221; radio button. Then click OK to accept.</p>
<p>7. What you should now have is a custom random design.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/random-designs/randomdesigns03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>8. Try this tutorial over and over by placing your rectangles and boxes from step 4 in different areas and different placements. This will give you all kinds of different random designs.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/random-designs-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Comic Balloons &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/comic-balloons-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/comic-balloons-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 22:23:24 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Comic Balloons]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=913</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/comic-balloons-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/comicballoon08-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="comicballoon08" title="comicballoon08" /></a>When creating comic strips or cartoon images, it&#8217;s handy to be able to express what the cartoon characters are saying in the strip. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll take a step-by-step approach on how to create (from scratch) the cartoon dialogue balloons. The two most important being speech balloons and thought balloons. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open up a photo of a cartoon image that you&#8217;ve drawn in wich you want to add the comic balloon. 2. Create a new layer. Name it &#8220;Balloon&#8221;. 3. With the &#8220;Balloon&#8221; layer selected, click the Eliptical Marquee tool. 4. To create a Speech Ballon, start by drawing an oval selection. 5. Next, select the Lasso tool. Hold down the and draw a small shape pointing to the character in the scene. 6. Choose &#8220;white&#8221; color from the Swatches palette. Then using the Paint Bucket tool, fill in your selection with white. 7. Press CTRL+D to deselect your selection. 8. Finally, right click the &#8220;Balloon&#8221; layer from the layers palette. Choose &#8220;Blending Options&#8221;. 9. The &#8220;Layer Styles&#8221; pop-up will appear. Click the &#8220;Stroke&#8221; checkbox at the bottom. Change the stroke properties to the following: 10. Click OK to accept the changes and close the &#8220;Layer [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-914" title="comicballoon08" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/comicballoon08-150x150.gif" alt="comicballoon08" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>When creating comic strips or cartoon images, it&#8217;s handy to be able to express what the cartoon characters are saying in the strip. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll take a step-by-step approach on how to create (from scratch) the cartoon dialogue balloons. The two most important being speech balloons and thought balloons.<br />
<span id="more-913"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open up a photo of a cartoon image that you&#8217;ve drawn in wich you want to add the comic balloon.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/comic-balloons/comicballoon01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. Create a new layer. Name it &#8220;Balloon&#8221;.</p>
<p>3. With the &#8220;Balloon&#8221; layer selected, click the Eliptical Marquee tool.</p>
<p>4. To create a Speech Ballon, start by drawing an oval selection.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/comic-balloons/comicballoon02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Next, select the Lasso tool. Hold down the  and draw a small shape pointing to the character in the scene.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/comic-balloons/comicballoon03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. Choose &#8220;white&#8221; color from the Swatches palette. Then using the Paint Bucket tool, fill in your selection with white.</p>
<p>7. Press CTRL+D to deselect your selection.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/comic-balloons/comicballoon04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>8. Finally, right click the &#8220;Balloon&#8221; layer from the layers palette. Choose &#8220;Blending Options&#8221;.</p>
<p>9. The &#8220;Layer Styles&#8221; pop-up will appear. Click the &#8220;Stroke&#8221; checkbox at the bottom. Change the stroke properties to the following:</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/comic-balloons/comicballoon05.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>10. Click OK to accept the changes and close the &#8220;Layer Styles&#8221; pop-up box.</p>
<p>11. You should now have your Comic Speech Balloon.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/comic-balloons/comicballoon06.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>12. Now all you need to do is add some text into the balloon and you&#8217;re done!</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/comic-balloons/comicballoon07.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>13. Feel free to do this same tutorial, but instead use the Eliptical Marquee tool to create &#8220;Thought Baloons&#8221;.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/comic-balloons/comicballoon08.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/comic-balloons-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Strand of Hair Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/strand-of-hair-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/strand-of-hair-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 22:21:42 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Strand of Hair]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=910</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/strand-of-hair-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/strandofhair04-128x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="strandofhair04" title="strandofhair04" /></a>Some people have asked me &#8220;What&#8217;s the purpose of making a strand of hair&#8221;? Well, aside from the fact that the tutorial itself will introduce you to the Liquify feature in Photoshop, it&#8217;s also useful if you are creating comics or cartoon characters. Just replicate this tutorial for each strand of hair and you&#8217;re good to go. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open up a new document in Photoshop. 2. Create a new layer on top of the Background layer. Call this layer &#8220;Hair&#8221;. 3. Use the Rectangular Marquee tool to create a square shaped selection. Select the paint bucket and fill this selection in with a hair color. In this case, I used brown. 4. Click anywhere on the canvas to de-activate the selection. 5. Goto Filter &#62; Liquify. 6. Use the brush to push and pull the square, manipulating it until it makes your hair strand shape. 7. When you have your hair strand shape, click OK to close Liquify. 8. Now right click the &#8220;Hair&#8221; layer, then select &#8220;Blending Options. 9. Goto the &#8220;Bevel and Emboss&#8221; section, make sure the section has a check in the checkbox so that it is active. 10. Adjust the Depth, Size, and [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-911" title="strandofhair04" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/strandofhair04-128x150.gif" alt="strandofhair04" width="100" height="118" /></p>
<p>Some people have asked me &#8220;What&#8217;s the purpose of making a strand of hair&#8221;? Well, aside from the fact that the tutorial itself will introduce you to the Liquify feature in Photoshop, it&#8217;s also useful if you are creating comics or cartoon characters. Just replicate this tutorial for each strand of hair and you&#8217;re good to go.<span id="more-910"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[
// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open up a new document in Photoshop.</p>
<p>2. Create a new layer on top of the Background layer. Call this layer &#8220;Hair&#8221;.</p>
<p>3. Use the Rectangular Marquee tool to create a square shaped selection. Select the paint bucket and fill this selection in with a hair color. In this case, I used brown.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/strand-of-hair/strandofhair01.gif" alt="" /><br />
4. Click anywhere on the canvas to de-activate the selection.</p>
<p>5. Goto Filter &gt; Liquify.</p>
<p>6. Use the brush to push and pull the square, manipulating it until it makes your hair strand shape.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/strand-of-hair/strandofhair02.gif" alt="" /><br />
7. When you have your hair strand shape, click OK to close Liquify.</p>
<p>8. Now right click the &#8220;Hair&#8221; layer, then select &#8220;Blending Options.</p>
<p>9. Goto the &#8220;Bevel and Emboss&#8221; section, make sure the section has a check in the checkbox so that it is active.</p>
<p>10. Adjust the Depth, Size, and Soften sliders so that the hair looks more 3D.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/strand-of-hair/strandofhair03.gif" alt="" /><br />
11. Click OK and you&#8217;re done!</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/strand-of-hair/strandofhair04.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/strand-of-hair-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Easy Copper Pipe &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/easy-copper-pipe-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/easy-copper-pipe-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 22:20:18 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Copper Pipe]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=907</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/easy-copper-pipe-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/easycopperpipe04-60x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="easycopperpipe04" title="easycopperpipe04" /></a>Here is a very easy tutorial for mechanics and technical artists that need to create good front end graphics for their HVAC or Mechanical drawing programs. All it takes is 6 easy steps and you have yourself a realistic looking copper pipe. This pipe can be changed using the Hue/Saturation features at the end to give it a different look, such as steel or metal. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Create a New File in Photoshop. 2. Create a new layer by pressing Shift+Ctrl+N. 3. Select the Rectangular Marquee tool. Draw a tall rectangle shape for the pipe. 4. Select the Eliptical Marquee tool and holding down the Shift key, add a circular selection to the bottom of the rectangular selection, like shown in the figure below: 4. Choose the Gradient tool. Select ‘Copper’ gradient from the gradient fill options in the gradient editor. 5. Fill the selection from left to right. 6. Press ctrl+d to deselect. Create a new layer again and draw a circle at the top of the pipe. Use ‘Copper’ gradient again to fill the selection, but this time fill from right to left. You should have a pipe now. 7. If you would like to change [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-908" title="easycopperpipe04" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/easycopperpipe04-60x150.gif" alt="easycopperpipe04" width="40" height="101" /></p>
<p>Here is a very easy tutorial for mechanics and technical artists that need to create good front end graphics for their HVAC or Mechanical drawing programs. All it takes is 6 easy steps and you have yourself a realistic looking copper pipe. This pipe can be changed using the Hue/Saturation features at the end to give it a different look, such as steel or metal.<span id="more-907"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Create a New File in Photoshop.</p>
<p>2. Create a new layer by pressing Shift+Ctrl+N.</p>
<p>3. Select the Rectangular Marquee tool. Draw a tall rectangle shape for the pipe.</p>
<p>4. Select the Eliptical Marquee tool and holding down the Shift key, add a circular selection to the bottom of the rectangular selection, like shown in the figure below:</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/easy-copper-pipe/easycopperpipe01.gif" alt="" /><br />
4. Choose the Gradient tool. Select ‘Copper’ gradient from the gradient fill options in the gradient editor.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/easy-copper-pipe/easycopperpipe02.gif" alt="" /><br />
5. Fill the selection from left to right.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/easy-copper-pipe/easycopperpipe03.gif" alt="" /><br />
6. Press ctrl+d to deselect. Create a new layer again and draw a circle at the top of the pipe. Use ‘Copper’ gradient again to fill the selection, but this time fill from right to left. You should have a pipe now.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/easy-copper-pipe/easycopperpipe04.gif" alt="" /><br />
7. If you would like to change the color of the pipes. Merge all layers, then goto Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Hue/Saturation. Change the Hue slider to give the pipe a different color&#8230;or slide the Saturation slider to -100 to make it black/white for steel piping.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/easy-copper-pipe-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Butterfly Icon &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/butterfly-icon-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/butterfly-icon-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 22:18:17 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Butterfly Icon]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=904</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/butterfly-icon-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/butterfly10-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="butterfly10" title="butterfly10" /></a>Sometimes, we artists might have a project (web design or print media), where we need to add graphic accents. Nothing accomplishes this more than creating small graphic icons. They are also useful in signatures, icons, or avatars on forum websites. They also make great graphics to use in emails. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through the process of making a butterfly icon. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Create a new file of your choice. 2. Create a new layer by pressing shift+ctrl+n. 3. Select Elliptical Marquee tool and draw the shape as shown in the picture. 4. Fill the selection with (#F87603) and press ctrl+d to deselect the layer. 5. Press ctrl+j for 2 times to get 2 copies of the layer and rotate these two layers to obtain the shape like in figure. 6. Link all these 3 layers and after that merge them by pressing ctrl+e. 7. Once again press ctrl+j to duplicate the layer. Now right click on this layer and select blending options. Under blending options, select color overlay and select the color (#FFDC03). Press OK. 8. Press Ctrl+T to transform the layer and reduce its size as shown in the figure. 9. Link and merge these [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-905" title="butterfly10" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/butterfly10-150x150.gif" alt="butterfly10" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Sometimes, we artists might have a project (web design or print media), where we need to add graphic accents. Nothing accomplishes this more than creating small graphic icons. They are also useful in signatures, icons, or avatars on forum websites. They also make great graphics to use in emails. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through the process of making a butterfly icon.<span id="more-904"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Create a new file of your choice.</p>
<p>2. Create a new layer by pressing shift+ctrl+n.</p>
<p>3. Select Elliptical Marquee tool and draw the shape as shown in the picture.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/butterfly/butterfly01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. Fill the selection with (#F87603) and press ctrl+d to deselect the layer.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/butterfly/butterfly02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Press ctrl+j for 2 times to get 2 copies of the layer and rotate these two layers to obtain the shape like in figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/butterfly/butterfly03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. Link all these 3 layers and after that merge them by pressing ctrl+e.</p>
<p>7. Once again press ctrl+j to duplicate the layer. Now right click on this layer and select blending options. Under blending options, select color overlay and select the color (#FFDC03). Press OK.</p>
<p>8. Press Ctrl+T to transform the layer and reduce its size as shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/butterfly/butterfly04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>9. Link and merge these two layers.</p>
<p>10. Now, press Ctrl+J to duplicate this layer and rotate it to get the shape as shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/butterfly/butterfly05.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>11. Now, the wings of butterfly are ready. We will add head and tail in it to get the perfect shape. For this, create a new layer by pressing shift+ctrl+n and fill it with color values of (#F87603).</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/butterfly/butterfly06.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>12. Rotate it and place it in the middle of the wings as shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/butterfly/butterfly07.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>13. Remove the upper portion by selecting it from either marquee tools or use eraser to erase it.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/butterfly/butterfly08.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>14. Now add a small circle over this layer and fill it with color values of (#F87603).</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/butterfly/butterfly09.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>15. Select line tool from custom shape tool and draw two lines as shown in the figure. Butterfly is ready&#8230;&#8230;. ooops&#8230;. catch it otherwise it will fly away from you. <img src='http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-includes/images/smilies/icon_smile.gif' alt=':-)' class='wp-smiley' /> )</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/butterfly/butterfly10.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/butterfly-icon-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Satellite Icon &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/satellite-icon-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/satellite-icon-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 22:16:20 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Satellite Icon]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=901</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/satellite-icon-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/satellite09-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="satellite09" title="satellite09" /></a>Here is a great tutorial that shows how to make a satellite icon. These little icons can be great as link button images for various sections of your website. For example, you might use this satellite icon for a link to a website&#8217;s overall site-map. Regardless of their use, they are fun and easy to make. Let&#8217;s get started on making one now! // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Create a new file and a layer. Select Rectangular Marquee Tool and draw a rectangle. Fill it with Black. Add a little white colored line as shown in the figure. 2. Create a new layer and draw a circle just below the first layer. Fill it with black. Move it towards upper side until you have a shape as shown in the figure. 3. Duplicate the circle layer and move it towards top of the rectangle. Add 1 pixel wide white color stroke in it. 4. Now draw a match-stick like shape and place it over the duplicated circle layer. With the help of brush tool, draw some white lines at right side of this layer. 5. Create a new layer. With the help of Polygonal Lasso tool draw and place a new [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-902" title="satellite09" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/satellite09-150x150.gif" alt="satellite09" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Here is a great tutorial that shows how to make a satellite icon. These little icons can be great as link button images for various sections of your website. For example, you might use this satellite icon for a link to a website&#8217;s overall site-map. Regardless of their use, they are fun and easy to make. Let&#8217;s get started on making one now!<span id="more-901"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Create a new file and a layer. Select Rectangular Marquee Tool and draw a rectangle. Fill it with Black. Add a little white colored line as shown in the figure.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/satellite-icon/satellite01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. Create a new layer and draw a circle just below the first layer. Fill it with black. Move it towards upper side until you have a shape as shown in the figure.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/satellite-icon/satellite02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Duplicate the circle layer and move it towards top of the rectangle. Add 1 pixel wide white color stroke in it.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/satellite-icon/satellite03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. Now draw a match-stick like shape and place it over the duplicated circle layer. With the help of brush tool, draw some white lines at right side of this layer.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/satellite-icon/satellite04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Create a new layer. With the help of Polygonal Lasso tool draw and place a new shape as shown in the figure. Stroke it with 1 px white color.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/satellite-icon/satellite05.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/satellite-icon/satellite06.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. Duplicate this layer by pressing ctrl+j, reduce its size and place it as shown in the figure. Group and merge these two layers.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/satellite-icon/satellite07.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Again, duplicate this layer and place it as shown in the figure.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/satellite-icon/satellite08.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>8. Draw and place a shape as shown in the figure. We now have an icon of satellite. This can be used as icon or as a part of logo. Another use of this design is to ‘spy’ your friend’s activities <img src='http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-includes/images/smilies/icon_wink.gif' alt=';-)' class='wp-smiley' /><br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/satellite-icon/satellite09.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/satellite-icon-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Creating a Screw</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/creating-a-screw/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/creating-a-screw/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 22:14:56 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Creating Screw]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=898</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/creating-a-screw/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/rivetscrew09-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="rivetscrew09" title="rivetscrew09" /></a>Creating rivets and screws are useful for many various types of projects. They look especially appealing when used in an interface design. All you need to do is add some screw heads to the corners of a square and it automatically transforms it into a panel. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll take a look at how to make a screw with a slot for a screwdriver in it. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open up a new document in Photoshop. 2. Create a new layer and name it &#8220;Screw&#8221;. 3. Select the Eliptical Marquee tool. Make a circular selection on your canvas. 4. Select the Gradient tool and be sure that it is set to &#8220;Radial&#8221;. 5. Make sure your gradient goes from a dark to a light color. 6. Click and drag the Gradient tool at an angle in the circle selection. 7. You should now have a 3D looking orb (or ball). 8. Create a new layer above the &#8220;Screw&#8221; layer and name it &#8220;Slot&#8221;. 9. Select the Rectangular Marquee tool. With the &#8220;Slot&#8221; layer active, create a rectanglur selection across the 3D ball for the slot. 10. Select the Gradient tool and be sure that it is set to [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-899" title="rivetscrew09" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/rivetscrew09-150x150.gif" alt="rivetscrew09" width="100" height="100" /><br />
Creating rivets and screws are useful for many various types of projects. They look especially appealing when used in an interface design. All you need to do is add some screw heads to the corners of a square and it automatically transforms it into a panel. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll take a look at how to make a screw with a slot for a screwdriver in it.<span id="more-898"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open up a new document in Photoshop.</p>
<p>2. Create a new layer and name it &#8220;Screw&#8221;.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/rivets-and-screws/rivetscrew01.gif" alt="" /><br />
3. Select the Eliptical Marquee tool. Make a circular selection on your canvas.</p>
<p>4. Select the Gradient tool and be sure that it is set to &#8220;Radial&#8221;.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/rivets-and-screws/rivetscrew02.gif" alt="" /><br />
5. Make sure your gradient goes from a dark to a light color.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/rivets-and-screws/rivetscrew03.gif" alt="" /><br />
6. Click and drag the Gradient tool at an angle in the circle selection.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/rivets-and-screws/rivetscrew04.gif" alt="" /><br />
7. You should now have a 3D looking orb (or ball).</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/rivets-and-screws/rivetscrew05.gif" alt="" /><br />
8. Create a new layer above the &#8220;Screw&#8221; layer and name it &#8220;Slot&#8221;.</p>
<p>9. Select the Rectangular Marquee tool. With the &#8220;Slot&#8221; layer active, create a rectanglur selection across the 3D ball for the slot.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/rivets-and-screws/rivetscrew06.gif" alt="" /><br />
10. Select the Gradient tool and be sure that it is set to &#8220;Linear&#8221; (the dark to white gradient color settings should be the same as they were from when you did Steps 4).<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/rivets-and-screws/rivetscrew07.gif" alt="" /><br />
11. Holding down the Shift key, drag the gradient tool from just below the rectangular selection to just above it.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/rivets-and-screws/rivetscrew08.gif" alt="" /><br />
12. You&#8217;re done! You should now have your screw top.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/rivets-and-screws/rivetscrew09.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/creating-a-screw/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Delicious Fruits Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/delicious-fruits-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/delicious-fruits-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 22:13:53 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Delicious Fruits Tutorial]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=895</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/delicious-fruits-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/deliciousfruit09-141x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="deliciousfruit09" title="deliciousfruit09" /></a>Creating cartoon fruit can be a great way to add color and enhance your websites or artistic projects. They can be used as accents in the headers or titles of your website or used as logos in your business cards and letterhead. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll learn the step-by-step process for creating fruit in Photoshop. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Create a new file of size of your choice. 2. Create a new layer by pressing shift+ctrl+n together. Name the layer fruit. 3. Select Ellipticle Marquee Tool and draw a circle in the middle of the canvas. 4. Choose (#FDE227) as foreground and (#FE3D17) as background color. 5. Select Gradient Tool by pressing &#8216;G&#8217; and then select radial gradient. Fill the selection from top to bottom. 6. Right click on Fruit layer and select blending option. 7. Select Stroke, color = (#7E0101) and width = 1. Press ok. 8. Again select Elliptical Marquee Tool and draw a circle as shown in the figure at the bottom of the fruit and press delete. The fruit should look like that shown in the picture. 9. Choose custom shape tool and select leaf as a custom shape. Draw leaf in proportion of the fruit. [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-896" title="deliciousfruit09" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/deliciousfruit09-141x150.gif" alt="deliciousfruit09" width="100" height="107" /></p>
<p>Creating cartoon fruit can be a great way to add color and enhance your websites or artistic projects. They can be used as accents in the headers or titles of your website or used as logos in your business cards and letterhead.<span id="more-895"></span></p>
<p>In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll learn the step-by-step process for creating fruit in Photoshop.</p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1.	Create a new file of size of your choice.</p>
<p>2.	Create a new layer by pressing shift+ctrl+n together. Name the layer fruit.</p>
<p>3.	Select Ellipticle Marquee Tool and draw a circle in the middle of the canvas.</p>
<p>4.	Choose (#FDE227) as foreground and (#FE3D17) as background color.</p>
<p>5.	Select Gradient Tool by pressing &#8216;G&#8217; and then select radial gradient. Fill the selection from top to bottom.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/delicious-fruits/deliciousfruit01.gif" alt="" /><br />
6.	Right click on Fruit layer and select blending option.</p>
<p>7.	Select Stroke, color = (#7E0101) and width = 1. Press ok.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/delicious-fruits/deliciousfruit02.gif" alt="" /><br />
8.	Again select Elliptical Marquee Tool and draw a circle as shown in the figure at the bottom of the fruit and press delete.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/delicious-fruits/deliciousfruit03.gif" alt="" /><br />
The fruit should look like that shown in the picture.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/delicious-fruits/deliciousfruit04.gif" alt="" /><br />
9. Choose custom shape tool and select leaf as a custom shape. Draw leaf in proportion of the fruit. While drawing leaf, press shift. Change the color to green (#0C6800).</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/delicious-fruits/deliciousfruit05.gif" alt="" /><br />
10.	Rasterize the shape 1 layer by right clicking on its name and select raterize layer.</p>
<p>11.	Duplicate the shape 1 layer by pressing ctrl+j.</p>
<p>12.	Rotate both of the shape layers to obtain the shape like shown in the figure below.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/delicious-fruits/deliciousfruit06.gif" alt="" /><br />
13.	Link both of the leaf layers as shown in the figure and after that, press ctrl+e to merge them.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/delicious-fruits/deliciousfruit07.gif" alt="" /><br />
14.	Move them just above the fruit layer like shown in the figure and draw a line to connect leaves to fruit.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/delicious-fruits/deliciousfruit08.gif" alt="" /><br />
15. The last step, select the fruit layer by clicking on its name. Now select brush tool (feather 17), press D to change color to default black and white. Press x to select white as a foreground color and draw a white area as shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/delicious-fruits/deliciousfruit09.gif" alt="" /><br />
16.	You have a fruit now. Do not try to eat it <img src='http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-includes/images/smilies/icon_smile.gif' alt=':-)' class='wp-smiley' /> )</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/delicious-fruits-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Create a Lipstick Container &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/create-a-lipstick-container-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/create-a-lipstick-container-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 22:12:38 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Lipstick Container]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=892</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/create-a-lipstick-container-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/lipstick11-91x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="lipstick11" title="lipstick11" /></a>If you are designing fashion logos or advertisements for fashion magazines, then creating a lipstick container can help add some graphic elements to your design. This is also a great tutorial for learning how to draw and apply different gradients using Photoshop. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through the steps required to make a lipstick container. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Create a new file of your choice. 2. Create a new layer by pressing Shift+CTRL+N together. 3. Select Rectangular Marquee Tool and draw a rectangle in the middle of the canvas. Keep the selection active, select the Elliptical Marquee tool. Press shift while dragging a new circular selection to create the selection shape as shown below. 4. Select Gradient Tool (or press &#8216;G&#8217;) and create a new gradient like shown in the figure below: 5. Fill the selection from left to right and cut the lower portion of the filled layer to obtain a shape like this: 6. Create a new layer. Select the Elliptical Marquee tool and draw a circle. Fill it with the Gradient Fill as shown in the figure. Place this layer above layer 1. 7. Create a new layer and select Rectangular Marquee tool to draw [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-893" title="lipstick11" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/lipstick11-91x150.gif" alt="lipstick11" width="62" height="103" /><br />
If you are designing fashion logos or advertisements for fashion magazines, then creating a lipstick container can help add some graphic elements to your design. This is also a great tutorial for learning how to draw and apply different gradients using Photoshop. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through the steps required to make a lipstick container.<br />
<span id="more-892"></span><br />
<script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Create a new file of your choice.<br />
2. Create a new layer by pressing Shift+CTRL+N together.<br />
3. Select Rectangular Marquee Tool and draw a rectangle in the middle of the canvas. Keep the selection active, select the Elliptical Marquee tool. Press shift while dragging a new circular selection to create the selection shape as shown below.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/lipstick/lipstick01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. Select Gradient Tool (or press &#8216;G&#8217;) and create a new gradient like shown in the figure below:</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/lipstick/lipstick02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Fill the selection from left to right and cut the lower portion of the filled layer to obtain a shape like this:</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/lipstick/lipstick03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. Create a new layer. Select the Elliptical Marquee tool and draw a circle. Fill it with the Gradient Fill as shown in the figure. Place this layer above layer 1.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/lipstick/lipstick04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Create a new layer and select Rectangular Marquee tool to draw a rectangle. Select the Elliptical Marquee tool, hold down the Shift key, and add a circular selection just over the rectangle as shown in the figure below:</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/lipstick/lipstick05.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>8. Fill it with same gradient as in step 6.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/lipstick/lipstick06.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>9. Now, right click on this layer and select blending option and use settings as shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/lipstick/lipstick07.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>10. Place this layer just above the circle layer which we created in step 6.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/lipstick/lipstick08.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>11. Duplicate this layer by pressing CTRL+J. Press CTRL+T to change the size of the layer as shown in the figure. After transforming, press Shift+CTRL+{ to send the layer backward. Your image should look like this.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/lipstick/lipstick09.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>12. Create a new layer again. Draw a shape with the help of Elliptical Marquee tool. Select #AB4D47 as foreground and # 641C1D as background color. Select linear gradient tool and fill the selection from left to right. Now, go to Filter&gt;Noise&gt;Add Noise and give these values:</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/lipstick/lipstick10.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>13. Draw a circle as shown in the figure and fill it with # AC4E48 and place it as shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/lipstick/lipstick11.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>14. Now, group and merge all layers and use the line tool to draw a black line as shown in the figure.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/create-a-lipstick-container-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Sophisticated Clock &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/sophisticated-clock-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/sophisticated-clock-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 22:11:34 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Sophisticated Clock]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=889</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/sophisticated-clock-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/sophisticatedclock06-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="sophisticatedclock06" title="sophisticatedclock06" /></a>Here is a useful clock to use in your graphic or website design projects. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through the steps for creating a fancy/sophisticated clock with face and hands. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Create a new file. 2. Create a new layer, select elliptical marquee tool and draw a circle in the middle of the canvas. 3. Select dark gray color as foreground color &#38; light gray as background. Fill it from bottom to top with gradient tool like shown in the figure. 4. Select the circle by holding control and clicking on its name in the Layers palette. Now go to Select &#62; Modify &#62; Contract and contract the selection by 4-5 pixels. Create a new layer &#38; Fill it with same gradient but from top to bottom. 5. Select the second layer again and repeat the steps as described in step 4 to have a new layer. (Selecting, Contracting, Creating New layer). Fill this layer with #242D3C. Right click on its layer name and select blending options and give values like shown in the figure. 6. Now type some texts as shown in the figure. 7. Create a new layer. Select polygon laso tool to draw [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-890" title="sophisticatedclock06" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/sophisticatedclock06-150x150.gif" alt="sophisticatedclock06" width="100" height="100" /><br />
Here is a useful clock to use in your graphic or website design projects. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through the steps for creating a fancy/sophisticated clock with face and hands.<span id="more-889"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1.	Create a new file.</p>
<p>2.	Create a new layer, select elliptical marquee tool and draw a circle in the middle of the canvas.</p>
<p>3. Select dark gray color as foreground color &amp; light gray as background. Fill it from bottom to top with gradient tool like shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/sophisticated-clock/sophisticatedclock01.gif" alt="" /><br />
4. Select the circle by holding control and clicking on its name in the Layers palette. Now go to Select &gt; Modify &gt; Contract and contract the selection by 4-5 pixels. Create a new layer &amp; Fill it with same gradient but from top to bottom.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/sophisticated-clock/sophisticatedclock02.gif" alt="" /><br />
5. Select the second layer again and repeat the steps as described in step 4 to have a new layer. (Selecting, Contracting, Creating New layer). Fill this layer with #242D3C. Right click on its layer name and select blending options and give values like shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/sophisticated-clock/sophisticatedclock03.gif" alt="" /><br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/sophisticated-clock/sophisticatedclock04.gif" alt="" /><br />
6. Now type some texts as shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/sophisticated-clock/sophisticatedclock05.gif" alt="" /><br />
7. Create a new layer. Select polygon laso tool to draw shapes like shown in the figure. Fill it with white color. Copy this layer and rotate it. Select Custom shape tool and draw a line. Your watch is ready.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/sophisticated-clock/sophisticatedclock06.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/sophisticated-clock-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Floating Bubbles &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/floating-bubbles-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/floating-bubbles-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 22:10:35 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Floating Bubbles]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=886</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/floating-bubbles-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/bubbles06.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="bubbles06" title="bubbles06" /></a>A lot of our photoshop projects call for different cartoon elements. Creating cartoon bubbles can be a great artistic element to use in your design projects. They are simple to make and fun when using to add some extra excitement in your artwork. In this simple tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk you through the process of creating a bunch of floating cartoon bubbles. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open a new document in Photoshop. Set the canvas dimensions to 600&#215;600 pixels. 2. Create a new layer, name it &#8220;Bubble&#8221;. 3. Select the Eliptical Marquee tool, draw a circle for your first bubble. 4. Fill in the circular selection with the color bubble of your choice. 5. Press CTRL + D to deselect the circular selection. 6. Right click the &#8220;Bubble&#8221; layer. Choose &#8220;Blending Options&#8221; from the list. 7. When the &#8220;Blending Options&#8221; Pop-Up appears, click the &#8220;Stroke&#8221; checkbox. Change the settings to the following: 8. Your bubble circle should now have a black cartoon line surrounding it. 9. Create a new layer above the &#8220;Bubble&#8221; layer. Call this layer &#8220;Highlight&#8221;. 10. Select the Polygonal Lasso tool. Draw a highlight selection area in the top right of the circle. 11. Goto Select &#62; Modify [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-887" title="bubbles06" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/bubbles06.gif" alt="bubbles06" width="100" height="99" /></p>
<p>A lot of our photoshop projects call for different cartoon elements. Creating cartoon bubbles can be a great artistic element to use in your design projects. They are simple to make and fun when using to add some extra excitement in your artwork. In this simple tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk you through the process of creating a bunch of floating cartoon bubbles.<span id="more-886"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open a new document in Photoshop. Set the canvas dimensions to 600&#215;600 pixels.</p>
<p>2. Create a new layer, name it &#8220;Bubble&#8221;.</p>
<p>3. Select the Eliptical Marquee tool, draw a circle for your first bubble.</p>
<p>4. Fill in the circular selection with the color bubble of your choice.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/floating-bubbles/bubbles01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Press CTRL + D to deselect the circular selection.</p>
<p>6. Right click the &#8220;Bubble&#8221; layer. Choose &#8220;Blending Options&#8221; from the list.</p>
<p>7. When the &#8220;Blending Options&#8221; Pop-Up appears, click the &#8220;Stroke&#8221; checkbox. Change the settings to the following:</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/floating-bubbles/bubbles02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>8. Your bubble circle should now have a black cartoon line surrounding it.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/floating-bubbles/bubbles03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>9. Create a new layer above the &#8220;Bubble&#8221; layer. Call this layer &#8220;Highlight&#8221;.</p>
<p>10. Select the Polygonal Lasso tool. Draw a highlight selection area in the top right of the circle.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/floating-bubbles/bubbles04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>11. Goto Select &gt; Modify &gt; Smooth. Enter 5 for the pixels.</p>
<p>12. You should now how a smooth selection for your highlight. Select the Paint Brush tool and fill in the selection with &#8220;White&#8221;.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/floating-bubbles/bubbles05.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>13. Press CTRL + D to deselect the circular selection.</p>
<p>14. Follow Steps 6 and 7 in order to create a similar black cartoon stroke line around the highlight.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/floating-bubbles/bubbles06.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>15. Press CTRL+E to merge the &#8220;Hightlight&#8221; layer with the &#8220;Bubble&#8221; layer.</p>
<p>16. Now with both the &#8220;Bubble&#8221; and &#8220;Highlight&#8221; layer merged as one single graphic, you can begin copying the bubbles over and over again. To keep the cartoon black lines with each copy, simply select the Move Tool, then holding down the ALT key, drag the bubble to create a duplicate bubble. This will then create a new layer with a new bubble on it.</p>
<p>17. Use CTRL+T to go into Transform mode and resize the new bubble copies to different sizes, placing the smaller bubbles right up over the bigger bubbles to give the effect that they are attached to one another. Be sure to place a few bubbles off by themselves as well.</p>
<p>18. Now you&#8217;re done. You should now have a bunch of cartoon bubbles.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/floating-bubbles-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Playing Cards – Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/playing-cards/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/playing-cards/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 22:01:56 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Playing Cards]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=882</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/playing-cards/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/playingcards05-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="playingcards05" title="playingcards05" /></a>Here&#8217;s a great little tutorial on how to create different playing cards using custom shapes. This is a great tutorial for learning various photoshopping tools. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Create a new file. 2. Select the Custom Shape tool and then select Rounded Rectangle tool. Draw the shape as shown in the figure. Select White color for the Rectangle. 3. Right click on the Shape 1 Layer and select Rasterize Layer. 4. Again, right click the Shape 1 Layer, goto &#8220;Blending Options&#8221;. Select Drop Shadow and adjust the sliders and properties to add a little shadow to the layer. 5. Select the Type tool and type &#8216;A&#8217; (for Ace). Use CTRL+T to adjust the size of the &#8216;A&#8217; according to the size of the card shape. 6. Select Red color for the &#8216;A&#8217;. Duplicate the character &#8216;A&#8217; by pressing CTRL+J and place it at the right side of the shape. 7. Now go to Edit &#62; Transform &#62; Rotate 180 (degrees). 8. Select the Custom Shape Tool and select the shape as shown in the figure and draw like the figure. Rasterize all the custom shapes as done in Step 3 prior to duplicate and transform them. 9. Now click [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img id="__mce" class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-883" title="playingcards05" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/playingcards05-150x150.gif" alt="playingcards05" width="100" height="100" /><br />
Here&#8217;s a great little tutorial on how to create different playing cards using custom shapes. This is a great tutorial for learning various photoshopping tools.<span id="more-882"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1.	Create a new file.</p>
<p>2. Select the Custom Shape tool and then select Rounded Rectangle tool. Draw the shape as shown in the figure. Select White color for the Rectangle.</p>
<p>3. Right click on the Shape 1 Layer and select Rasterize Layer.</p>
<p>4. Again, right click the Shape 1 Layer, goto &#8220;Blending Options&#8221;. Select Drop Shadow and adjust the sliders and properties to add a little shadow to the layer.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/playing-cards/playingcards01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Select the Type tool and type &#8216;A&#8217; (for Ace). Use CTRL+T to adjust the size of the &#8216;A&#8217; according to the size of the card shape.</p>
<p>6. Select Red color for the &#8216;A&#8217;. Duplicate the character &#8216;A&#8217; by pressing CTRL+J and place it at the right side of the shape.</p>
<p>7. Now go to Edit &gt; Transform &gt; Rotate 180 (degrees).</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/playing-cards/playingcards02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>8. Select the Custom Shape Tool and select the shape as shown in the figure and draw like the figure. Rasterize all the custom shapes as done in Step 3 prior to duplicate and transform them.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/playing-cards/playingcards03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>9. Now click on the card shape (shape 1) to select it and press CTRL+J to duplicate it and send it back by pressing Shift+CTRL+{.</p>
<p>10. Rotate this layer as shown in the figure.</p>
<p>11. Type &#8216;A&#8217; again and color it Black. Select Custom shape tool and draw, rasterize and rotate the shape as shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/playing-cards/playingcards04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>12. Repeat steps 2 for 11 more times to have playing cards like shown in the figure. Play with your friends; you will never lose this game. <img src='http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-includes/images/smilies/icon_smile.gif' alt=':-)' class='wp-smiley' /> )</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/playing-cards/playingcards05.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/playing-cards/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Socket Plug &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/socket-plug-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/socket-plug-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 22:00:55 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Socket Plug]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=879</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/socket-plug-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/socketplug10-150x116.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="socketplug10" title="socketplug10" /></a>In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through the steps necessary for creating a two-prong socket plug. These plug graphics are great for website interface designs or graphic design projects. What is especially useful about this tutorial is that once you learn it, you can apply variations in the design to create different types of plugs. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Create a new file of 500 x 500 pixel wide &#38; of 72 dpi. 2. Create a new layer and draw a box like shown in the figure. Fill it with Grey Color. 3. Now drag a guide in 1/3rd portion of the rectangle and draw a circle like shown in the figure. 4. Now press delete to remove the portion. 5. Draw a circle again in the lower portion of the rectangle and delete that portion too. You should have an image like that. 6. Select the plug image and right click on it and select blending options. Give this value to the plug image. 7. Press Ctrl+J to duplicate the layer. Select this duplicate layer by control clicking on its name. Now go to Select &#62; Modify &#62; Contract and contract the selection to 8-10 pixels. 8. Press Shift+Ctrl+I and [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-880" title="socketplug10" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/socketplug10-150x116.gif" alt="socketplug10" width="100" height="78" /></p>
<p>In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through the steps necessary for creating a two-prong socket plug. These plug graphics are great for website interface designs or graphic design projects. What is especially useful about this tutorial is that once you learn it, you can apply variations in the design to create different types of plugs.<span id="more-879"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1.	Create a new file of 500 x 500 pixel wide &amp; of 72 dpi.</p>
<p>2.	Create a new layer and draw a box like shown in the figure. Fill it with Grey Color.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/socket-plug/socketplug01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Now drag a guide in 1/3rd portion of the rectangle and draw a circle like shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/socket-plug/socketplug02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. Now press delete to remove the portion.</p>
<p>5. Draw a circle again in the lower portion of the rectangle and delete that portion too. You should have an image like that.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/socket-plug/socketplug03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. Select the plug image and right click on it and select blending options. Give this value to the plug image.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/socket-plug/socketplug04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Press Ctrl+J to duplicate the layer. Select this duplicate layer by control clicking on its name. Now go to Select &gt; Modify &gt; Contract and contract the selection to 8-10 pixels.</p>
<p>8. Press Shift+Ctrl+I and press delete to remove the portion.</p>
<p>9. Right click on the layer and select blending options and give these values.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/socket-plug/socketplug05.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/socket-plug/socketplug06.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>10. Now draw a circle and press delete as shown in the figure.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/socket-plug/socketplug07.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>11. Now select rectangular marquee tool to draw a line like shown in the figure and press delete. Again press Shift+Ctrl+Right arrow key to move the selection and press delete. Repeat this step for one more time. After that select single column marquee tool and press delete. Move the selection to have a shape like that.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/socket-plug/socketplug08.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>12. Right click on the layer 1 name and click on copy layer style.</p>
<p>13. Create a new layer. Draw a line as shown in the figure. Right click on the line layer and select paste layer style.</p>
<p>14. Duplicate this layer to have a shape like this:</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/socket-plug/socketplug09.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>15. Create a new layer and draw a straight line. Use liquify command (Filter &gt; Liquify) to have a shape like wire in the following image and add little drop shadow to the wire layer. Place this as shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/socket-plug/socketplug10.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>16. Your image is ready. <img src='http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-includes/images/smilies/icon_smile.gif' alt=':)' class='wp-smiley' /> </p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/socket-plug-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Perfume Bottle &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/perfume-bottle-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/perfume-bottle-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 21:59:52 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Drawing]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Perfume Bottle]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photoshop tutorial]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=875</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/perfume-bottle-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/perfumebottle101-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="perfumebottle10" title="perfumebottle10" /></a>This tutorial is great for fashion ads and fashion graphic design. In this tutorial, we walk through the steps required for creating a perfume or cologne bottle. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Create a new file of 500 x 500 wide 72 dpi, RGB mode. 2. Create a new layer by pressing shift+ctrl+n. Select rectangular marquee tool and draw a small rectangle toward the top of the canvas like shown in the figure. 3. Create a new gradient like shown in the figure. 4. Select Linear gradient tool and fill the selection from left to right. 5. Create a new layer. 6. Create a new Gradient fill like shown in the figure. 7. Select Elliptical Marquee tool and draw a circle just below the layer 1 and fill it with Radial gradient from Left to right. 8. Now, right click on the layer with the circular gradient selection and select blending options. Give the settings like shown in the figure. 9. Now, select the special effect brush. Set the foreground color to #FE8503 and draw flowers in the layer 2. 10. Erase the lower portion of the layer2. Your image should look like this. 11. Now, the image is almost ready. [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-877" title="perfumebottle10" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/perfumebottle101-150x150.gif" alt="perfumebottle10" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>This tutorial is great for fashion ads and fashion graphic design. In this tutorial, we walk through the steps required for creating a perfume or cologne bottle.<span id="more-875"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1.	Create a new file of 500 x 500 wide 72 dpi, RGB mode.</p>
<p>2. Create a new layer by pressing shift+ctrl+n. Select rectangular marquee tool and draw a small rectangle toward the top of the canvas like shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/perfume-bottle/perfumebottle01.gif" alt="" /><br />
3. Create a new gradient like shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/perfume-bottle/perfumebottle02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. Select Linear gradient tool and fill the selection from left to right.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/perfume-bottle/perfumebottle03.gif" alt="" /><br />
5.	Create a new layer.</p>
<p>6.	Create a new Gradient fill like shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/perfume-bottle/perfumebottle04.gif" alt="" /><br />
7. Select Elliptical Marquee tool and draw a circle just below the layer 1 and fill it with Radial gradient from Left to right.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/perfume-bottle/perfumebottle05.gif" alt="" /><br />
8. Now, right click on the layer with the circular gradient selection and select blending options. Give the settings like shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/perfume-bottle/perfumebottle06.gif" alt="" /><br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/perfume-bottle/perfumebottle07.gif" alt="" /><br />
9. Now, select the special effect brush. Set the foreground color to #FE8503 and draw flowers in the layer 2.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/perfume-bottle/perfumebottle08.gif" alt="" /><br />
10. Erase the lower portion of the layer2. Your image should look like this.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/perfume-bottle/perfumebottle09.gif" alt="" /><br />
11. Now, the image is almost ready. Add some pictures and write any text you want in the layer 2 and add a shadow. Play with your creativity.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/drawing/perfume-bottle/perfumebottle10.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/perfume-bottle-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Digital Bubbles &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/digital-bubbles-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/digital-bubbles-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 21:55:43 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[digital art]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=872</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/digital-bubbles-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/digitalbubbles05-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="digitalbubbles05" title="digitalbubbles05" /></a>Here is a great tutorial that was submitted by Tanmay on creating a digital bubble effect. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through the process involved in creating digital bubble effects using channels and the guassian blur filter. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Create a new file (237 x 255 pixel wide) 2. Fill the background with black color. 3. Now, create a new layer by pressing shift+ctrl+n together. 4. Press &#8216;M&#8217; to select Elliptical Marquee tool. 5. Create different circles as shown in the figure. When you are drawing circles, press shift to draw multiple circles. 6. Now select blue color (R:0, G:0, B:255) and press alt+backspace to fill the blue color in the circles. 7. Keep the selection active and click on channels palate. 8. Click on New Channel Button to create new alpha channel. 9. Fill the selected part with white. 10. Now press Ctrl+D to deselect. 11. Now go to Filter&#62;Blur&#62;Gussian Blur and set the radius around 4.5-4.8 12. Click Ok. 13. Now, return to main layer. 14. Go to select&#62;Load Selection&#62;Alpha 1 and click ok. 15. Change the blue color to white by pressing x. 16. Fill the selection with white. 17. You can now see bubbles.]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-873" title="digitalbubbles05" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/digitalbubbles05-150x150.gif" alt="digitalbubbles05" width="100" height="100" /><br />
Here is a great tutorial that was submitted by Tanmay on creating a digital bubble effect. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through the process involved in creating digital bubble effects using channels and the guassian blur filter.<span id="more-872"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Create a new file (237 x 255 pixel wide)</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/digital-art/digital-bubbles/digitalbubbles01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. Fill the background with black color.</p>
<p>3. Now, create a new layer by pressing shift+ctrl+n together.</p>
<p>4. Press &#8216;M&#8217; to select Elliptical Marquee tool.</p>
<p>5. Create different circles as shown in the figure. When you are drawing circles, press shift to draw multiple circles.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/digital-art/digital-bubbles/digitalbubbles02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. Now select blue color (R:0, G:0, B:255) and press alt+backspace to fill the blue color in the circles.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/digital-art/digital-bubbles/digitalbubbles03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Keep the selection active and click on channels palate.</p>
<p>8. Click on New Channel Button to create new alpha channel.</p>
<p>9. Fill the selected part with white.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/digital-art/digital-bubbles/digitalbubbles04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>10.	Now press Ctrl+D to deselect.</p>
<p>11.	Now go to Filter&gt;Blur&gt;Gussian Blur and set the radius around 4.5-4.8</p>
<p>12.	Click Ok.</p>
<p>13.	Now, return to main layer.</p>
<p>14.	Go to select&gt;Load Selection&gt;Alpha 1 and click ok.</p>
<p>15.	Change the blue color to white by pressing x.</p>
<p>16.	Fill the selection with white.</p>
<p>17.	You can now see bubbles.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/digital-art/digital-bubbles/digitalbubbles05.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/digital-bubbles-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>The Green Globe &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/the-green-globe-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/the-green-globe-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 21:54:33 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[digital art]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=869</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/the-green-globe-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/greenglobe09-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="greenglobe09" title="greenglobe09" /></a>In this tutorial, you will learn how to create the world map without difficulty. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Create a new file of any size you want. 2. Create a new layer by pressing shift+ctrl+n together. 3. Press &#8216;M&#8217; to select elleptical marquee tool and draw a circle in the middle of the document. Hold down the SHIFT key as you drag the circle to make it perfectly round. 4. Now fill the selection with black color. 5. Keep the selection active and go to filter&#62;render&#62;clouds. 6. Press CTRL+F two more times. Your image should look like this. 7. Deselect the layer by pressing CTRL+D 8. Go to Image &#62; Adjustments &#62; Brightness/Contrast and give the values like shown in the figure below: 9. You should have an image like this: 10. Now, select the magic wand tool or press &#8216;W&#8217; and select the black areas in the image. 11. Press CTRL+C to copy the black area. Without de-selecting, press CTRL+V to paste the copied portion over the selected area. 12. Now, select the &#8220;Layer 2&#8243;. Hold the CTRL key down and click on the &#8220;Layer 2&#8243;. Change the color black to light gray (#BAB8B8) and fill the selection with [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-870" title="greenglobe09" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/greenglobe09-150x150.gif" alt="greenglobe09" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>In this tutorial, you will learn how to create the world map without difficulty.<span id="more-869"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1.	Create a new file of any size you want.</p>
<p>2.	Create a new layer by pressing shift+ctrl+n together.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/digital-art/green-globe/greenglobe01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Press &#8216;M&#8217; to select elleptical marquee tool and draw a circle in the middle of the document. Hold down the SHIFT key as you drag the circle to make it perfectly round.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/digital-art/green-globe/greenglobe02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>4.	Now fill the selection with black color.</p>
<p>5.	Keep the selection active and go to filter&gt;render&gt;clouds.</p>
<p>6.	Press CTRL+F two more times. Your image should look like this.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/digital-art/green-globe/greenglobe03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>7.	Deselect the layer by pressing CTRL+D</p>
<p>8.	Go to Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Brightness/Contrast and give the values like shown in the figure below:</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/digital-art/green-globe/greenglobe04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>9.	You should have an image like this:<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/digital-art/green-globe/greenglobe05.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>10.	 Now, select the magic wand tool or press &#8216;W&#8217; and select the black areas in the image.</p>
<p>11.	Press CTRL+C to copy the black area. Without de-selecting, press CTRL+V to paste the copied portion over the selected area.</p>
<p>12. Now, select the &#8220;Layer 2&#8243;. Hold the CTRL key down and click on the &#8220;Layer 2&#8243;. Change the color black to light gray (#BAB8B8) and fill the selection with this color by pressing CTRL+Backspace key.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/digital-art/green-globe/greenglobe06.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>13. Now, go to Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Hue/Saturation or press CTRL+U to open the Hue/Saturation dialog box. I have selected a green color, but you can select any color of your choice.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/digital-art/green-globe/greenglobe07.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>14.	If you want, you can apply a layer effect like shown in the figure below.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/digital-art/green-globe/greenglobe08.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>15. Now, select the white areas of &#8220;Layer 1&#8243; with magic wand tool. Press SHIFT while selecting areas. By this, you can select multiple parts of the image at the same time.</p>
<p>16. Fill the selected white areas of &#8220;Layer 1&#8243; with a light green color. I have used (#88FFB9).</p>
<p>16.	You have your own globe <img src='http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-includes/images/smilies/icon_smile.gif' alt=':-)' class='wp-smiley' /> .</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/digital-art/green-globe/greenglobe09.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/the-green-globe-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Car Color Change</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/car-color-change/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/car-color-change/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 21:49:39 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Car Color Change]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=866</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/car-color-change/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/carcolorchange07-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="carcolorchange07" title="carcolorchange07" /></a>Have you ever wanted to see what your car might look like with a different paint job. Well, this tutorial is the answer. In this tutorial, you&#8217;ll learn a very basic technique for changing the color of car. This is a great tutorial for anyone considering whether to get a new paint job, but they are not sure what the new paint job might look like. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open in Photoshop a photograph of a car/automobile that you would like to change the color. 2. Click on the &#8220;Quick Mask Mode&#8221; toggle button. 3. Now select black from the swatches palette, then select the paint brush tool. Begin coloring in the paint area of the car. Please note: When you are in Quick Mask Mode, the paint brush will paint a transparent red color. This tells you which area you have colored in with Quick Mask Mode. 4. As you can see above in the illustration, I am filling in the painted area of the car. 5. However, it&#8217;s important to get clean edges as well and this involves using a smaller brush size for the fine edges of the paint on the car. 6.When it&#8217;s done, you [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-867" title="carcolorchange07" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/carcolorchange07-150x150.jpg" alt="carcolorchange07" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Have you ever wanted to see what your car might look like with a different paint job. Well, this tutorial is the answer. In this tutorial, you&#8217;ll learn a very basic technique for changing the color of car. This is a great tutorial for anyone considering whether to get a new paint job, but they are not sure what the new paint job might look like.<span id="more-866"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open in Photoshop a photograph of a car/automobile that you would like to change the color.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/color/car-color-change/carcolorchange01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. Click on the &#8220;Quick Mask Mode&#8221; toggle button.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/color/car-color-change/carcolorchange02.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Now select black from the swatches palette, then select the paint brush tool. Begin coloring in the paint area of the car. Please note: When you are in Quick Mask Mode, the paint brush will paint a transparent red color. This tells you which area you have colored in with Quick Mask Mode.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/color/car-color-change/carcolorchange03.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. As you can see above in the illustration, I am filling in the painted area of the car.</p>
<p>5. However, it&#8217;s important to get clean edges as well and this involves using a smaller brush size for the fine edges of the paint on the car.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/color/car-color-change/carcolorchange04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>6.When it&#8217;s done, you should have the entire car&#8217;s paint colored in the transparent red of the Quick Mask.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/color/car-color-change/carcolorchange05.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. When you are finished coloring in the Quick Mask, then click the &#8220;Edit In Standard Mode&#8221; button to exit &#8220;Quick Mask Mode&#8221;.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/color/car-color-change/carcolorchange06.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>8. You should now see a selection around the painted area of the car; however, this selection is really a selection of everything, except the paint. What you want is for the paint area to be selected instead. In order to do this, you need to goto Select &gt; Inverse from the main menu. This will make it so that the paint of the car is now selected.</p>
<p>9. Now goto Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Hue/Saturation from the main menu.</p>
<p>10. When the Hue/Saturation pop-up box appears, adjust the &#8220;Hue&#8221; slider. Adjusting the &#8220;Hue&#8221; slider will change the color of the car. Just keep sliding the slider until you find the color you want.</p>
<p>11. When you are satisfied, click OK to close the Hue/Saturation box and your car should now have the new color.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/color/car-color-change/carcolorchange07.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/car-color-change/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Toxic Green Smoke Stack</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/toxic-green-smoke-stack/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/toxic-green-smoke-stack/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 21:48:38 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photoshop tutorial]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Smoke Stack]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=863</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/toxic-green-smoke-stack/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/toxicgreensmoke07-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="toxicgreensmoke07" title="toxicgreensmoke07" /></a>In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll look at some tools and techniques in order to change standard white smoke into a toxic looking green smoke. Many of the techniques you will learn in this tutorial can be applied to numerous other projects. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open in Photoshop a photograph of standard smoke stack that is emitting white smoke. 2. As you can see from the photo above, there are various elements of color to consider. Of course, what we will be focusing on most in this tutorial is the smoke that is emmitting from the smoke stack. To do this, we need to select the smoke via &#8220;Quick Mask Mode&#8221;. 3. To change the color of the smoke, we must use &#8220;Quick Mask Mode&#8221;. So first select the color &#8220;black&#8221; from the swatches pallette. Then click the Quick Mask Mode toggle button. 4. Select the paint brush tool and begin coloring in the smoke. Please note: When you are painting in Quick Mask Mode, the result will be a transparent red color. You are not actually painting in red, this transparent red color is just to inform you of which areas that you are coloring in Quick Mask Mode. 5. [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-864" title="toxicgreensmoke07" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/toxicgreensmoke07-150x150.jpg" alt="toxicgreensmoke07" width="100" height="100" /><br />
In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll look at some tools and techniques in order to change standard white smoke into a toxic looking green smoke. Many of the techniques you will learn in this tutorial can be applied to numerous other projects.<span id="more-863"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open in Photoshop a photograph of standard smoke stack that is emitting white smoke.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/color/smoke-stack/toxicgreensmoke01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. As you can see from the photo above, there are various elements of color to consider. Of course, what we will be focusing on most in this tutorial is the smoke that is emmitting from the smoke stack. To do this, we need to select the smoke via &#8220;Quick Mask Mode&#8221;.</p>
<p>3. To change the color of the smoke, we must use &#8220;Quick Mask Mode&#8221;. So first select the color &#8220;black&#8221; from the swatches pallette. Then click the Quick Mask Mode toggle button.<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/color/smoke-stack/toxicgreensmoke02.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. Select the paint brush tool and begin coloring in the smoke. Please note: When you are painting in Quick Mask Mode, the result will be a transparent red color. You are not actually painting in red, this transparent red color is just to inform you of which areas that you are coloring in Quick Mask Mode.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/color/smoke-stack/toxicgreensmoke03.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. As you can see above in the illustration, I am filling in the smoke area with Quick Mask red. However, it&#8217;s important to get the edges as well and this involves using a smaller brush size, as well as applying the smudge tool for the hazey edges of the smoke. When it&#8217;s done, you should have all of the smoke colored in the transparent red of the Quick Mask.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/color/smoke-stack/toxicgreensmoke04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. When you are finished coloring in the Quick Mask, then click the &#8220;Edit In Standard Mode&#8221; button to exit &#8220;Quick Mask Mode&#8221;.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/color/smoke-stack/toxicgreensmoke05.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. This will turn the transparent red into a selection. However, the selection is of the blue sky and not the actual smoke itself. In order to fix this so that the smoke is selected instead, you will need to goto Select &gt; Inverse from the main menu.</p>
<p>8. Now the smoke is selected and you can apply your color changes to the selected areas of the smoke.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/color/smoke-stack/toxicgreensmoke06.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>9. Since our objective is to turn the smoke into a toxic green color, then goto Images &gt; Adjustments &gt; Color Balance.</p>
<p>10. When the Color Balance box appears, experiment with the color sliders to get the green color you are looking for to apply to the smoke.</p>
<p>11. Once you are satisfied with the green color, click OK and you now have a smoke stack with toxic green smoke coming out.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/color/smoke-stack/toxicgreensmoke07.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/toxic-green-smoke-stack/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Splash Button</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/splash-button/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/splash-button/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 21:47:27 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Splash Button]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=860</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/splash-button/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/splashbutton07-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="splashbutton07" title="splashbutton07" /></a>Some websites require the use of a whimsical or artistic effect to their design. What better way to convey this style than through the use of a button that looks like liquid or a splash. This tutorial will demonstrate how to make a Splash Button that looks like it&#8217;s made of liquid. You are free to choose the color and fonts as you work your way through this tutorial. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open a new document in Photoshop. 2. Create a new layer and call it &#8220;Splash. 3. With the &#8220;Splash&#8221; layer active, begin drawing a splash outline using the Polygonal Lasso tool (or if your hands are steady, you can use the regular Lasso Tool). 4. Goto Select &#62; Modify &#62; Smooth. Enter a value in the Smooth pop-up box. Choose a number that will smooth out the jagged edges in your polygonal lasso selection in Step 3, while still retaining the splash look. 5. Use the Paint Bucket tool and fill in your selection with any color you like. 6. Now right click the &#8220;Splash&#8221; layer, choose &#8220;Blending Properties&#8221;. 7. Click the &#8220;Bevel and Emboss&#8221; checkbox. Adjust the Depth, Size, and Soften sliders so that the splash [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-861" title="splashbutton07" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/splashbutton07-150x150.gif" alt="splashbutton07" width="100" height="100" /><br />
Some websites require the use of a whimsical or artistic effect to their design. What better way to convey this style than through the use of a button that looks like liquid or a splash. This tutorial will demonstrate how to make a Splash Button that looks like it&#8217;s made of liquid. You are free to choose the color and fonts as you work your way through this tutorial. <span id="more-860"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script> <!--OPENING TUTORIAL--></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open a new document in Photoshop.</p>
<p>2. Create a new layer and call it &#8220;Splash.</p>
<p>3. With the &#8220;Splash&#8221; layer active, begin drawing a splash outline using the Polygonal Lasso tool (or if your hands are steady, you can use the regular Lasso Tool).</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/splash-button/splashbutton01.gif" alt="" /><br />
4. Goto Select &gt; Modify &gt; Smooth. Enter a value in the Smooth pop-up box. Choose a number that will smooth out the jagged edges in your polygonal lasso selection in Step 3, while still retaining the splash look.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/splash-button/splashbutton02.gif" alt="" /><br />
5. Use the Paint Bucket tool and fill in your selection with any color you like.</p>
<p>6. Now right click the &#8220;Splash&#8221; layer, choose &#8220;Blending Properties&#8221;.</p>
<p>7. Click the &#8220;Bevel and Emboss&#8221; checkbox. Adjust the Depth, Size, and Soften sliders so that the splash has the 3D effect you desire.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/splash-button/splashbutton03.gif" alt="" /><br />
8. You should now have a 3D splash background.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/splash-button/splashbutton04.gif" alt="" /><br />
9. Next, select the Type Tool and type the text for your button.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/splash-button/splashbutton05.gif" alt="" /><br />
10. Finally, right click the Text layer that you just made. Click &#8220;Blending Properties&#8221;.</p>
<p>11. Click the &#8220;Bevel and Emboss&#8221; checkbox.</p>
<p>12. Under the Bevel and Emboss properties, there is a dropdown box labeled &#8220;Styles:&#8221;. Click this dropdown box and select &#8220;Pillow Emboss&#8221; from the list. Then click OK to exit &#8220;Blending Properties&#8221;.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/splash-button/splashbutton06.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>13. You should now have your Splash Button!</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/splash-button/splashbutton07.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/splash-button/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Glossy Highlight Button</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/glossy-highlight-button/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/glossy-highlight-button/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 21:46:27 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Highlight Button]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photoshop tutorial]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=857</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/glossy-highlight-button/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/highlightbutton06.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="highlightbutton06" title="highlightbutton06" /></a>In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through the necessary steps to create a button with a light highlight mark in the upper left side. This helps to add to the 3D effect of the button and helps give sites an asthetically pleasing appearance. We&#8217;ll also look at adding inner shadow text to the button to add an extra cool effect. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open a new document in Photoshop. 2. Create a new layer and call it &#8220;Button&#8221;. 3. Using the Eliptical Marquee selection tool, make a circular selection (hold down the SHIFT key as you drag your circular selection to make it perfectly circular). 4. Select the gradient tool, make sure that the Circular Gradient option is chosen. Then fill the circle selection with the gradient colors of your choice. Be sure the colors of the circular gradient go from dark outside to light inside. 5. Create a new layer, call it &#8220;Highlight&#8221;. 6. With the &#8220;Highlight&#8221; layer active, select the Polygonal Lasso tool. Begin drawing a selection around the top portion of the circle. As 7. Go to Select &#62; Modify &#62; Smooth. Depending on how jagged your polygonal selection was, enter a value into the Smooth pop-up [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-858" title="highlightbutton06" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/highlightbutton06.gif" alt="highlightbutton06" width="100" height="99" /></p>
<p>In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through the necessary steps to create a button with a light highlight mark in the upper left side. This helps to add to the 3D effect of the button and helps give sites an asthetically pleasing appearance. We&#8217;ll also look at adding inner shadow text to the button to add an extra cool effect.<span id="more-857"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script> <!--OPENING TUTORIAL--></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open a new document in Photoshop.</p>
<p>2. Create a new layer and call it &#8220;Button&#8221;.</p>
<p>3. Using the Eliptical Marquee selection tool, make a circular selection (hold down the SHIFT key as you drag your circular selection to make it perfectly circular).</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/highlight-button/highlightbutton01.gif" alt="" /><br />
4. Select the gradient tool, make sure that the Circular Gradient option is chosen. Then fill the circle selection with the gradient colors of your choice. Be sure the colors of the circular gradient go from dark outside to light inside.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/highlight-button/highlightbutton02.gif" alt="" /><br />
5. Create a new layer, call it &#8220;Highlight&#8221;.</p>
<p>6. With the &#8220;Highlight&#8221; layer active, select the Polygonal Lasso tool. Begin drawing a selection around the top portion of the circle. As</p>
<p>7. Go to Select &gt; Modify &gt; Smooth. Depending on how jagged your polygonal selection was, enter a value into the Smooth pop-up box, then click OK. You sould now have a smooth selection overlapping the colored circle.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/highlight-button/highlightbutton03.gif" alt="" /><br />
8. Use the Paint Bucket tool and fill that selection in with white color.</p>
<p>9. Change the Opacity settings of the &#8220;Highlight&#8221; layer to 50%.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/highlight-button/highlightbutton04.gif" alt="" /><br />
10. Right click the &#8220;Button&#8221; layer, then select &#8220;Blending Properties&#8221;.</p>
<p>12. Click the checkbox next to &#8220;Stroke&#8221;. Change the stroke color to a dark color that is the same as the color of your gradient. Once the stroke is the way you want it, click OK to close out of &#8220;Blending Properties&#8221;.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/highlight-button/highlightbutton05.gif" alt="" /><br />
13. Next, select the Text Tool and type anything over the button.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/highlight-button/highlightbutton06.gif" alt="" /><br />
14. Right click the new &#8220;Text&#8221; layer and select &#8220;Blending Properties&#8221;.</p>
<p>15. Click the checkbox next to &#8220;Inner Shadow&#8221; to give the letters an inner shadow on the button. Make sure the direction of the inner shadow is facing the same direction as the highlight.</p>
<p>16. Congratulations, you&#8217;re done!</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/glossy-highlight-button/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Light Button</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/light-button/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/light-button/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 21:45:22 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Light Button]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=854</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/light-button/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/lightbutton09-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="lightbutton09" title="lightbutton09" /></a>There are many uses, especially in websites and interface design, for a button that has a small light inside. It can be used to add a futuristic look or a control board appearance to any flat panels on your website. They are appealing in that they give your site extra flare, while not coming across as too flashy to distract the visitor. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll break down the simple steps necessary to create one of these buttons. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open a new document in Photoshop. 2. Create a new layer and call it &#8220;Button&#8221;. 3. On the active &#8220;Button&#8221; layer, create a circular selection using the Eliptical Marquee tool. 4. Now select the Gradient tool. Change the settings so that it is a radial gradient. 5. In the Gradient Editor, create a gradient that goes from a light color to a dark color. For simplicity of this tutorial, we&#8217;ll just go with white to black. 6. Now drag the Gradient cursor from the top left of the circular selection to the lower right. Then let go. This will give us the appearance of a 3D ball. 7. Goto Select &#62; Modify &#62; Contract. Enter a value in [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-855" title="lightbutton09" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/lightbutton09-150x150.gif" alt="lightbutton09" width="100" height="100" /><br />
There are many uses, especially in websites and interface design, for a button that has a small light inside. It can be used to add a futuristic look or a control board appearance to any flat panels on your website. They are appealing in that they give your site extra flare, while not coming across as too flashy to distract the visitor. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll break down the simple steps necessary to create one of these buttons.<span id="more-854"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script> <!--OPENING TUTORIAL--></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open a new document in Photoshop.</p>
<p>2. Create a new layer and call it &#8220;Button&#8221;.</p>
<p>3. On the active &#8220;Button&#8221; layer, create a circular selection using the Eliptical Marquee tool.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/light-button/lightbutton01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. Now select the Gradient tool. Change the settings so that it is a radial gradient.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/light-button/lightbutton02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. In the Gradient Editor, create a gradient that goes from a light color to a dark color. For simplicity of this tutorial, we&#8217;ll just go with white to black.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/light-button/lightbutton03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. Now drag the Gradient cursor from the top left of the circular selection to the lower right. Then let go. This will give us the appearance of a 3D ball.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/light-button/lightbutton04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Goto Select &gt; Modify &gt; Contract. Enter a value in the Contract box that appears. This will be the amount of pixels that you want the border rim of your button. Click OK.</p>
<p>8. Your previous circular selection should now have shrunken inwards over the 3D ball image. (IF the circular selection becomes angular in some areas after contracting, then simply goto Select &gt; Modify &gt; Smooth and enter a value to smooth it out).</p>
<p>9. Now repeat Step 6, but this time, go from the lower right area of the circular selection to the upper left.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/light-button/lightbutton05.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>10. With the new gradient going in the opposite direction in the smaller circular selection, you should now have a beveled 3D button image.</p>
<p>11. Keep the circular selection still active, goto Select &gt; Modify &gt; Contract again. Enter a value. This will create the circular selection for the light that will go inside of the button. (Smooth out the circular selection again with Select &gt; Modify &gt; Smooth, if necessary).</p>
<p>12. Now create a new gradient color scheme in the Gradient Editor for the light. I chose white to green to dark green as my color scheme.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/light-button/lightbutton07.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>13. Be sure that the small circular selection inside the button is still active and create a new layer. Call it &#8220;Light&#8221;.</p>
<p>14. With the &#8220;Light&#8221; layer active, follow the same procedure in Step 6. That is, use the gradient cursor and drag from upper left to lower right inside the small circular selection.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/light-button/lightbutton08.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>15. The small light should now be colored in. Right click on the &#8220;Light&#8221; layer and select &#8220;Blending Properties&#8221;.</p>
<p>16. Click the checkbox next to &#8220;Drop Shadow&#8221; and adjust the opacity of the shadow so that it fits right with the rest of the button. (Also feel free to tweak the Distance, Spread, and Size sliders to get just the right shading effect of the shadow from the light).</p>
<p>17. Congratulations! Your done!<br />
<img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/light-button/lightbutton09.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/light-button/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Aqua Button &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/aqua-button-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/aqua-button-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 21:44:23 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Buttons]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photoshop tutorial]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=851</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/aqua-button-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/aquabutton07.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="aquabutton07" title="aquabutton07" /></a>In this tutorial, we will learn how to create aqua buttons, which are frequently used in WebPages. Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Create a new file of any size you want. 2. Select ‘Elliptical Marquee Tool’ to draw a circle. 3. Now, select ‘Rectangular Marquee Tool’ to draw a rectangle from middle of the circle like shown in the figure. Press shift while drawing the rectangle. 4. Select the ‘Elliptical Marquee Tool’ once again to draw a circle like shown in the figure (hold shift while drawing this circle also). 5. Now create a new layer by pressing ‘Shift+Ctrl+N’. Select the light blue color (#9BF2FF) as foreground color. Leave the white color as the background. Now select Gradiant Tool by pressing ‘G’. Fill the selection from, top to bottom. 6. In the layer pallet, right click on the layer1 and select blending option. Under blending option, click on stroke and select (#7BA6AC) color and stroke width 1. Your image should look something like this. 7. Now we want to give white color shade to the button, so that it looks like aqua shade. For that, select the layer1 by pressing ‘ctrl+click’ on the layer1. Create a new layer by pressing ‘shift+ctrl+n’ together [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-852" title="aquabutton07" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/aquabutton07.gif" alt="aquabutton07" width="100" height="47" /><br />
In this tutorial, we will learn how to create aqua buttons, which are frequently used in WebPages.<span id="more-851"></span></p>
<p><!--OPENING TUTORIAL--></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1.	Create a new file of any size you want.</p>
<p>2.	Select ‘Elliptical Marquee Tool’ to draw a circle.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/aqua-button/aquabutton01.gif" alt="" /><br />
3. Now, select ‘Rectangular Marquee Tool’ to draw a rectangle from middle of the circle like shown in the figure. Press shift while drawing the rectangle.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/aqua-button/aquabutton02.gif" alt="" /><br />
4. Select the ‘Elliptical Marquee Tool’ once again to draw a circle like shown in the figure (hold shift while drawing this circle also).</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/aqua-button/aquabutton03.gif" alt="" /><br />
5. Now create a new layer by pressing ‘Shift+Ctrl+N’. Select the light blue color (#9BF2FF) as foreground color. Leave the white color as the background. Now select Gradiant Tool by pressing ‘G’. Fill the selection from, top to bottom.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/aqua-button/aquabutton04.gif" alt="" /><br />
6. In the layer pallet, right click on the layer1 and select blending option. Under blending option, click on stroke and select (#7BA6AC) color and stroke width 1. Your image should look something like this.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/aqua-button/aquabutton05.gif" alt="" /><br />
7. Now we want to give white color shade to the button, so that it looks like aqua shade. For that, select the layer1 by pressing ‘ctrl+click’ on the layer1. Create a new layer by pressing ‘shift+ctrl+n’ together and select the box ‘group with previous layer’. Keep the selection active</p>
<p>8.	Move the layer2 like shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/aqua-button/aquabutton06.gif" alt="" /><br />
9. Use ‘Gradiant tool&#8217; and select foreground to transparent fill style and fill the selection to the lower portion of the selection. Use white as a foreground color. Adjust the white shade by pressing down arrow key few times.</p>
<p>10.	You have an aqua button.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/aqua-button/aquabutton07.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/aqua-button-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Very Easy Buttons &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/very-easy-buttons-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/very-easy-buttons-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 21:43:12 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Buttons]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photoshop tutorial]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=848</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/very-easy-buttons-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/veryeasybuttons02.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="veryeasybuttons02" title="veryeasybuttons02" /></a>Need to create very basic and simple buttons for your website. This tutorial shows how to create very easy 3D buttons that can be colored with different hues to add variation. These buttons are also great for using in bulleted lists. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Create a new file. 2. Create a new layer. Select Elliptical Marquee Tool to draw a small circle. Fill it with color of your choice. I have used #F37AE6 for fill. 3. Now right click on the name of this layer and select blending options. Under blending options, select Inner Shadow. Don’t change any settings. Now select brush tool. Select white color and press once to have a shape like shown in the figure. 4. Use Hue/Saturation command to have different colored buttons.]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-849" title="veryeasybuttons02" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/veryeasybuttons02.gif" alt="veryeasybuttons02" width="100" height="71" /></p>
<p>Need to create very basic and simple buttons for your website. This tutorial shows how to create very easy 3D buttons that can be colored with different hues to add variation. These buttons are also great for using in bulleted lists.<span id="more-848"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script> <!--OPENING TUTORIAL--></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Create a new file.</p>
<p>2. Create a new layer. Select Elliptical Marquee Tool to draw a small circle. Fill it with color of your choice. I have used #F37AE6 for fill.</p>
<p>3. Now right click on the name of this layer and select blending options. Under blending options, select Inner Shadow. Don’t change any settings. Now select brush tool. Select white color and press once to have a shape like shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/very-easy-buttons/veryeasybuttons01.gif" alt="" /><br />
4. Use Hue/Saturation command to have different colored buttons.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/buttons/very-easy-buttons/veryeasybuttons02.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/very-easy-buttons-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Clone Stamp Erasing</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/clone-stamp-erasing/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/clone-stamp-erasing/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 21:36:00 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Clone Stamp Erasing]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=844</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/clone-stamp-erasing/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/clonestamperasing07-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="clonestamperasing07" title="clonestamperasing07" /></a>One of the most important techniques for any photoshop artist is to know how to effectively erase elements and objects that are in a photo. This is typically done using the clone stamp tool. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through a basic step-by-step process of erasing n object from a photo using the Clone Stamp, as well as other tools. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open a photograph that has an object or element in it that you want to remove from the photo. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll use the following flower image. We are going to use the clone stamp tool to erase the smaller flowers at the bottom of the photo, so that we are left with just the main flower image. 2. Click the Clone Stamp tool. 3. Adjust the Brush Size so that it is proportionate to the areas that you will be clone stamping. 4. Now we need to clone the areas around the element that we want to erase. In the case of this photo, we have bushes surrounding the flowers at the bottom. So with the clone stamp tool selected, hold down the ALT key and click on some of the bushes to the [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-845" title="clonestamperasing07" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/clonestamperasing07-150x150.jpg" alt="clonestamperasing07" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>One of the most important techniques for any photoshop artist is to know how to effectively erase elements and objects that are in a photo. This is typically done using the clone stamp tool. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through a basic step-by-step process of erasing n object from a photo using the Clone Stamp, as well as other tools.<span id="more-844"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open a photograph that has an object or element in it that you want to remove from the photo. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll use the following flower image. We are going to use the clone stamp tool to erase the smaller flowers at the bottom of the photo, so that we are left with just the main flower image.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/basics/clone-stamp-erasing/clonestamperasing01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. Click the Clone Stamp tool.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/basics/clone-stamp-erasing/clonestamperasing02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Adjust the Brush Size so that it is proportionate to the areas that you will be clone stamping.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/basics/clone-stamp-erasing/clonestamperasing03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. Now we need to clone the areas around the element that we want to erase. In the case of this photo, we have bushes surrounding the flowers at the bottom. So with the clone stamp tool selected, hold down the ALT key and click on some of the bushes to the left of the flower.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/basics/clone-stamp-erasing/clonestamperasing04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Now let go of the ALT key after clicking the bushes and move your cursor over the area you want to erase. Click and paint over the area.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/basics/clone-stamp-erasing/clonestamperasing05.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5. Continue selecting areas of the background by holding down ALT key and clicking, then letting go of the ALT key and painting over the object you want to clone stamp over and erase.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/basics/clone-stamp-erasing/clonestamperasing06.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Eventually, you will have clone stamped out the entire element or object and it will finally be erased. To add some variation, feel free to clone stamp other areas of the background so that it doesn&#8217;t appear that the same part of the background was clone stamped over and over again. Notice in the image below, I clone stamped other areas of the bush background in the photo to clone over the flowers at the bottom. This variation makes it undetectable to the viewer.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/basics/clone-stamp-erasing/clonestamperasing07.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/clone-stamp-erasing/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Pen Tool Selecting and Masking</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/pen-tool-selecting-and-masking/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/pen-tool-selecting-and-masking/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 21:34:54 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Masking]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Pen Tool]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Selecting]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=841</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/pen-tool-selecting-and-masking/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/pentoolselecting10-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="pentoolselecting10" title="pentoolselecting10" /></a>There are many situations that call for the precise selecting and masking of an object in a photograph. Many times, this can be achieved with simply using the Quick Mask mode; however, as you may have seen before, using the paint brush tool can result in some hazey selections around the edges of an object. Some situations call for a very clean line. This is when the pen tool as a selection method comes in handy the most. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through the steps required to select an object by using the pen tool in photoshop. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open a photograph with the object that you wish to select and cut out. For the simplicity of this tutorial, we&#8217;ll use the pen tool to select an apple. 2. Select the Pen Tool. 3. Find a point along the edge of the apple. Click and drag the pen tool toward the direction of the curve in the object. When you click and drag upon first using the pen tool, this automatically creates shape handles to adjust the line of the curve. For now, don&#8217;t worry about this, since we can fine tune these later in this tutorial. [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-842" title="pentoolselecting10" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/pentoolselecting10-150x150.jpg" alt="pentoolselecting10" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>There are many situations that call for the precise selecting and masking of an object in a photograph. Many times, this can be achieved with simply using the Quick Mask mode; however, as you may have seen before, using the paint brush tool can result in some hazey selections around the edges of an object. Some situations call for a very clean line. This is when the pen tool as a selection method comes in handy the most. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll walk through the steps required to select an object by using the pen tool in photoshop.<span id="more-841"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open a photograph with the object that you wish to select and cut out. For the simplicity of this tutorial, we&#8217;ll use the pen tool to select an apple.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/basics/pen-selecting/pentoolselecting01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. Select the Pen Tool.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/basics/pen-selecting/pentoolselecting02.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Find a point along the edge of the apple. Click and drag the pen tool toward the direction of the curve in the object. When you click and drag upon first using the pen tool, this automatically creates shape handles to adjust the line of the curve. For now, don&#8217;t worry about this, since we can fine tune these later in this tutorial.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/basics/pen-selecting/pentoolselecting03.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. Click your next point along the path of the curve and hold down while you drag.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/basics/pen-selecting/pentoolselecting04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Just continue clicking and dragging new points around the curves of the object. When you need a point to be a corner point, then hold down the ALT key when you drag.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/basics/pen-selecting/pentoolselecting05.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. When you have completely set your path around the object (apple), then you will come to the point you first started with. Make sure you close the path by clicking this first point. You will know that the path will close, because a small circle will appear next to the pen tool cursor.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/basics/pen-selecting/pentoolselecting06.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Next we need to fine tune the curves of the path. To do this, select the Direct Selection Tool.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/basics/pen-selecting/pentoolselecting07.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>8. Click on the path surrounding the apple. You will then be able to select the shape handles for the curves. Readjust any shape handles so that the path better aligns with the curve of the object (apple).</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/basics/pen-selecting/pentoolselecting08.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>9. When you are done fine tuning all the points of the path. With the Direct Selection Tool still selected, right click the path, then choose Make Selection from the pop-up list.</p>
<p>10. Accept the default values in the Make Selection pop-up box. Click OK.</p>
<p>11. You should now have a super clean selection of your object.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/basics/pen-selecting/pentoolselecting10.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/pen-tool-selecting-and-masking/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Shape Based Selections</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/shape-based-selections/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/shape-based-selections/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 21:33:48 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[basic]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[shape selection]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=838</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/shape-based-selections/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/shapeselections03-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="shapeselections03" title="shapeselections03" /></a>A great way to enhance photos is to create shape based selections. They can be used to crop your photos so that they are within a pre-defined shape. In this tutorial, you will learn how to select a portion of the photographs with different custom shapes available in Photoshop. The technique is very basic; however, you can achieve amazing selection effects through this technique. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open your image. 2. Switch to quick mask mode by pressing Q or clicking as shown in the figure. 3. Go to custom shape tool and select any shape of your choice. I have chosen heart shape for my image. 4. Now switch back to normal mode by pressing Q. Now press shift+ctrl+I to inverse the selection. You can see a heart shape selection above my face. Copy and paste the selection in a new file. Experiment with this very simple, but great technique and you will have amazing selections.]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-839" title="shapeselections03" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/shapeselections03-150x150.gif" alt="shapeselections03" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>A great way to enhance photos is to create shape based selections. They can be used to crop your photos so that they are within a pre-defined shape. In this tutorial, you will learn how to select a portion of the photographs with different custom shapes available in Photoshop. The technique is very basic; however, you can achieve amazing selection effects through this technique.<span id="more-838"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1.	Open your image.</p>
<p>2.	Switch to quick mask mode by pressing Q or clicking as shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/basics/shape-based-selections/shapeselections01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Go to custom shape tool and select any shape of your choice. I have chosen heart shape for my image.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/basics/shape-based-selections/shapeselections02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. Now switch back to normal mode by pressing Q. Now press shift+ctrl+I to inverse the selection. You can see a heart shape selection above my face. Copy and paste the selection in a new file.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/basics/shape-based-selections/shapeselections03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>Experiment with this very simple, but great technique and you will have amazing selections.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/shape-based-selections/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Photoshop Tutorial &#8211; Swirled Lines</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/photoshop-tutorial-swirled-lines/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/photoshop-tutorial-swirled-lines/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 21:31:29 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Swirled Lines]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=834</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/photoshop-tutorial-swirled-lines/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/swirledlines04-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="swirledlines04" title="swirledlines04" /></a>In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll learn to create a swirled lines effect for use in surreal/abstract artwork. The benefits of such a tutorial can be applied in collage work or any other abstract artwork. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open a new document in Photoshop (I will be using dimensions 300&#215;300 px). 2. Create a new layer. Name it &#8220;Vertical Lines&#8221;. 3. With the &#8220;Vertical Lines&#8221; layer active, use the rectangual marquee tool to creat vertical lines from top to bottom. Use the paint bucket to fill them in with a color. 4. Goto Filter &#62; Distort &#62; Wave. 5. Set the following: Number of Generators: 5 Wave Length: (Min: 34) and (Max: 155) Amplitude: (Min: 6) and (Max: 155) Scale: (Min: 25%) and (Max: 26%) 6. Click OK to accept changes. 7. Click CTRL+F again to apply the Wave Filter. 8. Click CTRL+F again to apply the Wave Filter one last time. 9. Right click the &#8220;Vertical Lines&#8221; layer. Select &#8220;Blending Options&#8221; from the pop-up list. 10. Apply the &#8220;Bevel and Emboss&#8221; to give the lines some 3D depth. 11. Apply the &#8220;Drop Shadow&#8221; and set the shadow properties so that a slight shadow appears from the swirled lines.]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-835" title="swirledlines04" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/swirledlines04-150x150.gif" alt="swirledlines04" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll learn to create a swirled lines effect for use in surreal/abstract artwork. The benefits of such a tutorial can be applied in collage work or any other abstract artwork.<span id="more-834"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open a new document in Photoshop (I will be using dimensions 300&#215;300 px).</p>
<p>2. Create a new layer. Name it &#8220;Vertical Lines&#8221;.</p>
<p>3. With the &#8220;Vertical Lines&#8221; layer active, use the rectangual marquee tool to creat vertical lines from top to bottom. Use the paint bucket to fill them in with a color.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/abstracts/swirled-lines/swirledlines01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. Goto Filter &gt; Distort &gt; Wave.</p>
<p>5. Set the following:<br />
Number of Generators: 5<br />
Wave Length: (Min: 34) and (Max: 155)<br />
Amplitude: (Min: 6) and (Max: 155)<br />
Scale: (Min: 25%) and (Max: 26%)</p>
<p>6. Click OK to accept changes.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/abstracts/swirled-lines/swirledlines02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Click CTRL+F again to apply the Wave Filter.</p>
<p>8. Click CTRL+F again to apply the Wave Filter one last time.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/abstracts/swirled-lines/swirledlines03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>9. Right click the &#8220;Vertical Lines&#8221; layer. Select &#8220;Blending Options&#8221; from the pop-up list.</p>
<p>10. Apply the &#8220;Bevel and Emboss&#8221; to give the lines some 3D depth.</p>
<p>11. Apply the &#8220;Drop Shadow&#8221; and set the shadow properties so that a slight shadow appears from the swirled lines.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/abstracts/swirled-lines/swirledlines04.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/photoshop-tutorial-swirled-lines/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Photoshop Tutorial – Fabric Folds</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/fabric-folds/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/fabric-folds/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 21:30:36 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[abstract]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[fabric folds]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=831</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/fabric-folds/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/fabricfolds07-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="fabricfolds07" title="fabricfolds07" /></a>In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll learn to create a background image that looks like multiple folds of silk fabric. This is a great effect and technique for your collage artwork, as it is easy to blend or fade in with other elements of a collage piece. // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open a new document in Photoshop (I will be using dimensions 600&#215;600 px). 2. With your blank canvas open, select the Gradient tool. 3. Open the Gradient Editor and set the gradient from Black to White (By default, the black to white gradient should be the square in the top left corner of the &#8220;Presets&#8221; section). 3. Make sure the Mode is set to &#8220;Difference&#8221; and the Opacity is set to &#8220;70%&#8221;. 4. Now with the Gradient Tool, click and drag from the top left of the canvas to the bottom right. 5. There should now be a gradient going from light to dark at a diagonal direction. 6. Now with the Gradient Tool, click and drag from the lower right of the canvas to the top left. 7. Simply repeat steps 4 through 6 over and over again. What you will get are many different types of folds that look [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-832" title="fabricfolds07" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/fabricfolds07-150x150.gif" alt="fabricfolds07" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll learn to create a background image that looks like multiple folds of silk fabric. This is a great effect and technique for your collage artwork, as it is easy to blend or fade in with other elements of a collage piece.<span id="more-831"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open a new document in Photoshop (I will be using dimensions 600&#215;600 px).</p>
<p>2. With your blank canvas open, select the Gradient tool.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/abstracts/fabric-folds/fabricfolds01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Open the Gradient Editor and set the gradient from Black to White (By default, the black to white gradient should be the square in the top left corner of the &#8220;Presets&#8221; section).</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/abstracts/fabric-folds/fabricfolds02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Make sure the Mode is set to &#8220;Difference&#8221; and the Opacity is set to &#8220;70%&#8221;.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/abstracts/fabric-folds/fabricfolds03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. Now with the Gradient Tool, click and drag from the top left of the canvas to the bottom right.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/abstracts/fabric-folds/fabricfolds04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. There should now be a gradient going from light to dark at a diagonal direction.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/abstracts/fabric-folds/fabricfolds05.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. Now with the Gradient Tool, click and drag from the lower right of the canvas to the top left.</p>
<p>7. Simply repeat steps 4 through 6 over and over again. What you will get are many different types of folds that look like fabric.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/abstracts/fabric-folds/fabricfolds06.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>8. Goto Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Color Balance. Adjust the color sliders to give the fabric folds some color.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/abstracts/fabric-folds/fabricfolds07.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/fabric-folds/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>1</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Inner Bevel Button</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/inner-bevel-button/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/inner-bevel-button/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 21:22:31 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tutorials]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[3d effect. inner bevel]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=827</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/inner-bevel-button/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/innerbevelbutton07-150x150.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="innerbevelbutton07" title="innerbevelbutton07" /></a>Creating an inner bevel button can add some spice to your interface. The 3D effect that it has helps to create a sophisticated look that will excite visitors as they browse your websites. This photoshop tutorial will show you a quick and easy way to make an inner bevel effect. What&#8217;s especially nice about this tutorial is that it is easy to replicate in all the recent versions of photoshop (ie. before &#8220;Blending Options&#8221; was introduced in later versions). // Step-by-Step Instructions: 1. Open a new document in Photoshop. Create a new layer called &#8220;Orb&#8221; on top of the Background layer. 2. With the &#8220;Orb&#8221; layer active, select the Eliptical Marquee tool and make a circle selection. 3. Select the Gradient tool and be sure that it is set to &#8220;Radial&#8221;. 4. Make sure your gradient goes from a dark to a light color. 5. Click and drag the Gradient tool at an angle in the circle selection. 6. You should now have a 3D looking orb (ball). 7. Goto Select &#62; Modify &#62; Expand. When the Expand Selection pop-up appears, type in 3 or 4 for the Expand By: box. Click OK and you should have the following image. [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-828" title="innerbevelbutton07" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/innerbevelbutton07-150x150.gif" alt="innerbevelbutton07" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Creating an inner bevel button can add some spice to your interface. The 3D effect that it has helps to create a sophisticated look that will excite visitors as they browse your websites. This <em>photoshop tutorial</em> will show you a quick and easy way to make an inner bevel effect. What&#8217;s especially nice about this tutorial is that it is easy to replicate in all the recent versions of photoshop (ie. before &#8220;Blending Options&#8221; was introduced in later versions).<span id="more-827"></span></p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Dark b links */
google_ad_slot = "3757747871";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script></p>
<div><strong>Step-by-Step Instructions:</strong></div>
<p>1. Open a new document in Photoshop. Create a new layer called &#8220;Orb&#8221; on top of the Background layer.</p>
<p>2. With the &#8220;Orb&#8221; layer active, select the Eliptical Marquee tool and make a circle selection.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/3d-effects/inner-bevel-button/innerbevelbutton01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Select the Gradient tool and be sure that it is set to &#8220;Radial&#8221;.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/3d-effects/inner-bevel-button/innerbevelbutton02.gif" alt="" /><br />
4. Make sure your gradient goes from a dark to a light color.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/3d-effects/inner-bevel-button/innerbevelbutton03.gif" alt="" /><br />
5. Click and drag the Gradient tool at an angle in the circle selection.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/3d-effects/inner-bevel-button/innerbevelbutton04.gif" alt="" /><br />
6. You should now have a 3D looking orb (ball).</p>
<p>7. Goto Select &gt; Modify &gt; Expand. When the Expand Selection pop-up appears, type in 3 or 4 for the Expand By: box. Click OK and you should have the following image.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/3d-effects/inner-bevel-button/innerbevelbutton05.gif" alt="" /><br />
8. Create a new layer underneath the &#8220;Orb&#8221; layer. Call this layer &#8220;Highlight&#8221;.</p>
<p>9. With the &#8220;Highlight&#8221; layer selected, use the Paint Bucket tool and fill in the circle with white.</p>
<p>10. Create a new layer on top of the &#8220;Highlight&#8221; layer. Call this layer &#8220;Shadow&#8221;.</p>
<p>11. With the &#8220;Shadow&#8221; layer selected, use the Paint Bucket tool and fill in the circle with black.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/3d-effects/inner-bevel-button/innerbevelbutton06.gif" alt="" /><br />
12. Select the &#8220;Highlight&#8221; layer, then goto Filter &gt; Blur &gt; Gaussian Blur. For the Radius, enter &#8220;3&#8243; as number of pixels.</p>
<p>14. Select the &#8220;Shadow&#8221; layer, then goto Filter &gt; Blur &gt; Gaussian Blur. For the Radius, enter &#8220;3&#8243; as number of pixels.</p>
<p>15. Finally, make sure the &#8220;Highlight&#8221; layer is active, then select the Move tool. Use the move tool to move the white &#8220;highlight&#8221; layer down and to the right. You can use your arrow tools on your keyboard for fine tuning the position.</p>
<p><img src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/3d-effects/inner-bevel-button/innerbevelbutton07.gif" alt="" /><br />
16. You&#8217;re done!</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-editing/inner-bevel-button/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Creating a 3D look soda can</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/creating-a-3d-look-soda-can/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/creating-a-3d-look-soda-can/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 21:20:05 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Lessons]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[3d soda can]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[effect]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=824</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/creating-a-3d-look-soda-can/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/soda_can_26-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="soda_can_26" title="soda_can_26" /></a>Start by creating a rectangle using rectangular shape tool. Enable add to shape area from the top bar. Create an ellipse using elliptical shape tool. Create a rectangle on the top using rectangular shape tool. Press Ctrl+T. Right Click and select Warp. Adjust the nodes to get the shape as shown. Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as shown. Create an ellipse using elliptical shape tool. Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as shown. Ctrl+Click the layer thumbnail to get the selection. Apply a gray to transparent gradient. Create an ellipse using elliptical shape tool. Enable intersect shape areas from the top bar. Create another ellipse using elliptical shape tool. Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as shown. Ctrl+Click to get the selection. Contract the selection by 1 pixels. Create a new layer. Apply Black to white gradient. Change layer mode to screen for this layer. Ctrl+Click the soda can layer thumbnail to get the selection. Create a new layer. Apply Black to white to black gradient. Change layer mode to screen and opacity to 50% for this layer. Create a dull white sheen right [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-825" title="soda_can_26" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/soda_can_26-150x150.jpg" alt="soda_can_26" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Start by creating a rectangle using rectangular shape tool.<span id="more-824"></span></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/soda-can/soda_can_01.jpg" alt="" width="277" height="278" /></p>
<p>Enable add to shape area from the top bar. Create an ellipse using elliptical          shape tool.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/soda-can/soda_can_02.jpg" alt="" width="277" height="278" /></p>
<p>Create a rectangle on the top using rectangular shape tool. Press Ctrl+T.          Right Click and select Warp. Adjust the nodes to get the shape as shown.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/soda-can/soda_can_03.jpg" alt="" width="277" height="278" /></p>
<p>Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as          shown.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/soda-can/soda_can_04.jpg" alt="" width="422" height="380" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/soda-can/soda_can_05.jpg" alt="" width="214" height="272" /></p>
<p>Create an ellipse using elliptical shape tool.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/soda-can/soda_can_06.jpg" alt="" width="204" height="290" /></p>
<p>Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as          shown.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/soda-can/soda_can_07.jpg" alt="" width="439" height="386" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/soda-can/soda_can_08.jpg" alt="" width="439" height="386" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/soda-can/soda_can_09.jpg" alt="" width="439" height="386" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/soda-can/soda_can_10.jpg" alt="" width="200" height="300" /></p>
<p>Ctrl+Click the layer thumbnail to get the selection. Apply a gray to          transparent gradient.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/soda-can/soda_can_11.jpg" alt="" width="200" height="300" /></p>
<p>Create an ellipse using elliptical shape tool. Enable intersect shape          areas from the top bar. Create another ellipse using elliptical shape          tool.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/soda-can/soda_can_12.jpg" alt="" width="264" height="190" /></p>
<p>Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as          shown.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/soda-can/soda_can_13.jpg" alt="" width="435" height="382" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/soda-can/soda_can_14.jpg" alt="" width="435" height="382" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/soda-can/soda_can_15.jpg" alt="" width="435" height="382" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/soda-can/soda_can_16.jpg" alt="" width="282" height="213" /></p>
<p>Ctrl+Click to get the selection. Contract the selection by 1 pixels.          Create a new layer. Apply Black to white gradient. Change layer mode to          screen for this layer.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/soda-can/soda_can_17.jpg" alt="" width="282" height="213" /></p>
<p>Ctrl+Click the soda can layer thumbnail to get the selection. Create          a new layer. Apply Black to white to black gradient. Change layer mode          to screen and opacity to 50% for this layer.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/soda-can/soda_can_18.jpg" alt="" width="412" height="276" /></p>
<p>Create a dull white sheen right below the elliptical lid on top using          a soft brush with reduced opacity.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/soda-can/soda_can_19.jpg" alt="" width="185" height="110" /></p>
<p>Create a rounded rectangle using rounded rectangle shape tool. Press          Ctrl+T. Right Click and select Perspective. Adjust the nodes to get the          shape as shown. Enable &#8220;subtract from shape area&#8221; at the top bar. Create          a circle using elliptical shape tool to create a hole in it.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/soda-can/soda_can_20.jpg" alt="" width="213" height="176" /></p>
<p>Press Ctrl+T. Right Click and select distort. Adjust the nodes to give          it a 3D perspective look.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/soda-can/soda_can_21.jpg" alt="" width="185" height="110" /></p>
<p>Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as          shown.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/soda-can/soda_can_22.jpg" alt="" width="421" height="376" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/soda-can/soda_can_23.jpg" alt="" width="274" height="196" /></p>
<p>Press and hold Alt key and keep pressing down arrow key to create 3D          extrusion. Select and merge all duplicate layers. Fill it with a darker          shade of gray. Move the original layer above all the layers in layer order          in layer palette.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/soda-can/soda_can_24.jpg" alt="" width="274" height="196" /></p>
<p>Either type text over it or use a label graphic.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/soda-can/soda_can_25.jpg" alt="" width="192" height="283" /></p>
<p>Press Ctrl+T. Right Click and select Warp. Adjust the nodes to get the          shape as shown.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/soda-can/soda_can_26.jpg" alt="" width="219" height="291" /></p>
<p>Move this layer right above the soda can layer in layer order in layer          palette.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/creating-a-3d-look-soda-can/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Creating a shining marble text effect with reflective surface</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/creating-a-shining-marble-text-effect-with-reflective-surface/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/creating-a-shining-marble-text-effect-with-reflective-surface/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 21:18:49 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Lessons]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[effects]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[marble text effect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photoshop tutorial]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=821</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/creating-a-shining-marble-text-effect-with-reflective-surface/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/text_14-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="text_14" title="text_14" /></a>Start by typing your text using a bold rounded font. Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as shown. From layer menu select layer style&#62;&#62;create layers. Select and merge both the resulting layers. Ctrl+Click the layer thumbnail to get the selection. From select menu select modify&#62;&#62;contract. Contract the selection by a few pixels. Press Ctrl+J to copy paste the selection in a new layer. Ctrl+Click the layer thumbnail to get the selection. From select menu select modify&#62;&#62;contract. Contract the selection by a few pixels. Press Ctrl+J to copy paste the selection in a new layer. Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as shown. Select and merge all layers. Duplicate the layer. Press Ctrl+T. Right click and select Flip Vertical. Press Ctrl+T and scale down vertically. Select eraser tool with soft brush settings. Erase the lower half of this layer. Reduce opacity to create subtle reflection.]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-822" title="text_14" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/text_14-150x150.jpg" alt="text_14" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Start by typing your text using a bold rounded font.<span id="more-821"></span></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/marble-text/text_01.jpg" alt="" width="396" height="202" /></p>
<p>Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as          shown.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/marble-text/text_02.jpg" alt="" width="455" height="395" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/marble-text/text_03.jpg" alt="" width="455" height="395" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/marble-text/text_04.jpg" alt="" width="455" height="395" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/marble-text/text_05.jpg" alt="" width="455" height="395" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/marble-text/text_06.jpg" alt="" width="407" height="198" /></p>
<p>From layer menu select layer style&gt;&gt;create layers. Select and merge both          the resulting layers. Ctrl+Click the layer thumbnail to get the selection.          From select menu select modify&gt;&gt;contract. Contract the selection by a          few pixels.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/marble-text/text_07.jpg" alt="" width="407" height="198" /></p>
<p>Press Ctrl+J to copy paste the selection in a new layer.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/marble-text/text_08.jpg" alt="" width="407" height="198" /></p>
<p>Ctrl+Click the layer thumbnail to get the selection. From select menu          select modify&gt;&gt;contract. Contract the selection by a few pixels. Press          Ctrl+J to copy paste the selection in a new layer.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/marble-text/text_09.jpg" alt="" width="407" height="198" /></p>
<p>Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as          shown.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/marble-text/text_10.jpg" alt="" width="433" height="392" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/marble-text/text_11.jpg" alt="" width="433" height="392" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/marble-text/text_12.jpg" alt="" width="401" height="195" /></p>
<p>Select and merge all layers. Duplicate the layer. Press Ctrl+T. Right          click and select Flip Vertical. Press Ctrl+T and scale down vertically.          Select eraser tool with soft brush settings. Erase the lower half of this          layer.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/marble-text/text_13.jpg" alt="" width="418" height="223" /></p>
<p>Reduce opacity to create subtle reflection.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/marble-text/text_14.jpg" alt="" width="418" height="223" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/creating-a-shining-marble-text-effect-with-reflective-surface/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Creating heart with arrow going through it</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/creating-heart-with-arrow-going-through-it/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/creating-heart-with-arrow-going-through-it/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 21:17:29 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Lessons]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[heart with arrow]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photoshop tutorial]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=818</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/creating-heart-with-arrow-going-through-it/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/heart_13-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="heart_13" title="heart_13" /></a>Start by creating a heart shape using custom shape tool. Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as shown. Create &#8220;Arrow 15&#8243; shape using custom shape tool. Rotate it and place diagonally. Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as shown. From layer menu select layer style&#62;&#62;create layers. Select and merge all the resulting layers. Create a rectangular selection using rectangular marquee tool. Press Ctrl+Shift+J to cut paste the selection in a new layer. Move the other layer below the heart layer in layer order in layer palette. Create an elliptical selection using elliptical marquee tool. Press Alt+Ctrl+D to feather the selection. Create a new layer and fill it with black color. Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as shown. Select and merge all the layers. Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as shown.]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-819" title="heart_13" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/heart_13-150x150.jpg" alt="heart_13" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Start by creating a heart shape using custom shape tool.<span id="more-818"></span></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/heart-arrow/heart_01.jpg" alt="" width="386" height="386" /></p>
<p>Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as          shown.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/heart-arrow/heart_02.jpg" alt="" width="449" height="384" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/heart-arrow/heart_03.jpg" alt="" width="449" height="384" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/heart-arrow/heart_04.jpg" alt="" width="449" height="384" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/heart-arrow/heart_05.jpg" alt="" width="449" height="384" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/heart-arrow/heart_06.jpg" alt="" width="226" height="236" /></p>
<p>Create &#8220;Arrow 15&#8243; shape using custom shape tool. Rotate it and place          diagonally.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/heart-arrow/heart_07.jpg" alt="" width="344" height="276" /></p>
<p>Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as          shown.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/heart-arrow/heart_08.jpg" alt="" width="422" height="375" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/heart-arrow/heart_09.jpg" alt="" width="326" height="296" /></p>
<p>From layer menu select layer style&gt;&gt;create layers. Select and merge          all the resulting layers. Create a rectangular selection using rectangular          marquee tool. Press Ctrl+Shift+J to cut paste the selection in a new layer.          Move the other layer below the heart layer in layer order in layer palette.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/heart-arrow/heart_10.jpg" alt="" width="326" height="296" /></p>
<p>Create an elliptical selection using elliptical marquee tool. Press Alt+Ctrl+D          to feather the selection. Create a new layer and fill it with black color.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/heart-arrow/heart_11.jpg" alt="" width="326" height="296" /></p>
<p>Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as          shown.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/heart-arrow/heart_12.jpg" alt="" width="430" height="373" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/heart-arrow/heart_13.jpg" alt="" width="306" height="255" /></p>
<p>Select and merge all the layers. Double click the layer to open layer          style window. Apply settings as shown.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/heart-arrow/heart_14.jpg" alt="" width="428" height="382" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/creating-heart-with-arrow-going-through-it/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Drawing a cool cartoon sun</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/drawing-a-cool-cartoon-sun/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/drawing-a-cool-cartoon-sun/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 19:09:50 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Lessons]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[cartoon sun]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Drawing]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photoshop tutorial]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=815</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/drawing-a-cool-cartoon-sun/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/sun_11-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="sun_11" title="sun_11" /></a>Start by select polygon shape tool. From options bar at the top choose settings as shown below. Press Shift while creating this shape to get equal axes. Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as shown. Create a circle using elliptical shape tool. Apply gradient overlay layer style as shown below. Create an ellipse using elliptical shape tool. Enable add to shape area from the top bar. Create another ellipse using elliptical shape tool. Using line tool create a line connecting both glasses. Apply a gradient overlay layer style. Using pen tool create smiling lips as shown below. Also create eyebrows slightly above the glasses using pen tool.]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-816" title="sun_11" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/sun_11-150x150.jpg" alt="sun_11" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Start by select polygon shape tool. From options bar at the top choose          settings as shown below.<span id="more-815"></span></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-sun/sun_01.jpg" alt="" width="407" height="172" /></p>
<p>Press Shift while creating this shape to get equal axes.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-sun/sun_02.jpg" alt="" width="245" height="225" /></p>
<p>Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as          shown.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-sun/sun_03.jpg" alt="" width="427" height="382" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-sun/sun_04.jpg" alt="" width="427" height="382" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-sun/sun_05.jpg" alt="" width="427" height="382" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-sun/sun_06.jpg" alt="" width="284" height="298" /></p>
<p>Create a circle using elliptical shape tool. Apply gradient overlay layer          style as shown below.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-sun/sun_07.jpg" alt="" width="284" height="298" /></p>
<p>Create an ellipse using elliptical shape tool.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-sun/sun_08.jpg" alt="" width="284" height="298" /></p>
<p>Enable add to shape area from the top bar. Create another ellipse using          elliptical shape tool. Using line tool create a line connecting both glasses.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-sun/sun_09.jpg" alt="" width="284" height="298" /></p>
<p>Apply a gradient overlay layer style.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-sun/sun_10.jpg" alt="" width="284" height="298" /></p>
<p>Using pen tool create smiling lips as shown below.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-sun/sun_11.jpg" alt="" width="284" height="298" /></p>
<p>Also create eyebrows slightly above the glasses using pen tool.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/drawing-a-cool-cartoon-sun/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Designing a modern website header for web design services</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/stuff-for-designers/designing-a-modern-website-header-for-web-design-services/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/stuff-for-designers/designing-a-modern-website-header-for-web-design-services/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 18:49:20 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Tricks]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[design]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photoshop tutorial]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[website header]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=812</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/stuff-for-designers/designing-a-modern-website-header-for-web-design-services/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/header_15-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="header_15" title="header_15" /></a>Start by creating a new file of header size. Apply a nice gradient as shown below. From &#8220;Filter&#8221; menu select &#8220;Distort&#62;&#62;Wave&#8221;. Apply settings as shown. Press Ctrl+F twice to reapply the filter with same settings. Create a few multicolor circles as shown below. Create a big white ellipse and apply some drop shadow layer style. Duplicate layer. Scale down, remove layer style and fill with a dark gray color. Create a series of four circular buttons using same technique but with much smaller size and place as shown below. Create a few vertical lines of varying width. Decorate with tiny green circles. Create a medium size ellipse and place as shown below. Use same technique as explained above. Duplicate all layers. select and merge all duplicate layers. Move this layer right above the big gray ellipse layer in layer order in layer palette. Move this layer towards left. Press Ctrl+Alt+G to create a clipping mask. Change layer mode to luminosity and opacity to 18%. Insert a relevant image and place above the white ellipse. Populate the header by inserting company logo and link names.]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-813" title="header_15" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/header_15-150x150.jpg" alt="header_15" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Start by creating a new file of header size. Apply a nice gradient as          shown below.<span id="more-812"></span></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/header/header_01.jpg" alt="" width="500" height="161" /></p>
<p>From &#8220;Filter&#8221; menu select &#8220;Distort&gt;&gt;Wave&#8221;. Apply settings as shown.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/header/header_02.jpg" alt="" width="432" height="399" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/header/header_03.jpg" alt="" width="500" height="157" /></p>
<p>Press Ctrl+F twice to reapply the filter with same settings.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/header/header_04.jpg" alt="" width="500" height="157" /></p>
<p>Create a few multicolor circles as shown below.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/header/header_05.jpg" alt="" width="500" height="157" /></p>
<p>Create a big white ellipse and apply some drop shadow layer style.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/header/header_06.jpg" alt="" width="500" height="157" /></p>
<p>Duplicate layer. Scale down, remove layer style and fill with a dark          gray color.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/header/header_07.jpg" alt="" width="500" height="157" /></p>
<p>Create a series of four circular buttons using same technique but with          much smaller size and place as shown below.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/header/header_08.jpg" alt="" width="500" height="157" /></p>
<p>Create a few vertical lines of varying width. Decorate with tiny green          circles.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/header/header_09.jpg" alt="" width="500" height="157" /></p>
<p>Create a medium size ellipse and place as shown below. Use same technique          as explained above.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/header/header_10.jpg" alt="" width="500" height="157" /></p>
<p>Duplicate all layers. select and merge all duplicate layers. Move this          layer right above the big gray ellipse layer in layer order in layer palette.          Move this layer towards left. Press Ctrl+Alt+G to create a clipping mask.</p>
<p>Change layer mode to luminosity and opacity to 18%.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/header/header_11.jpg" alt="" width="500" height="157" /></p>
<p>Insert a relevant image and place above the white ellipse.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/header/header_14.jpg" alt="" width="251" height="206" /></p>
<p>Populate the header by inserting company logo and link names.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/header/header_15.jpg" alt="" width="500" height="161" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/stuff-for-designers/designing-a-modern-website-header-for-web-design-services/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Drawing a cartoon snake</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/drawing-a-cartoon-snake/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/drawing-a-cartoon-snake/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 18:47:56 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Lessons]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[cartoon snake]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Drawing]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=809</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/drawing-a-cartoon-snake/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/cartton_snake-12-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="cartton_snake-12" title="cartton_snake-12" /></a>Start by applying gradient to the background layer. Create a circle using elliptical shape tool. Apply stoke layer style. Create an ellipse for the eye using elliptical shape tool. Create a circle for the eyeball using elliptical shape tool. Press Ctrl+Alt+G to create a clipping mask. Create a very tiny circle inside the eyeball. Duplicate these three layers. Select and rotate these three layers to create the other eye. You can resize the eyeball to break the monotony of uniformity. Using pen tool create teeth and tongue. Color them as shown below. Create a rectangle using rectangular shape tool. Press Ctrl+T. Right Click and select Warp. Adjust the nodes to get the shape as shown. Enable add to shape area from the top bar. Again create a rectangle and warp it to get shape shown below. Repeat the above steps to create a complete snake body. Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as shown. Create a dark green circle. Apply stroke layer style. Press Ctrl+Alt+G to create a clipping mask. Press Alt key and drag this circle layer to create it&#8217;s more duplicate that are automatically clip masked. Using pen tool and brush tool create [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-810" title="cartton_snake-12" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/cartton_snake-12-150x150.jpg" alt="cartton_snake-12" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Start by applying gradient to the background layer.<span id="more-809"></span></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-snake/cartton_snake-01.jpg" alt="" width="346" height="328" /></p>
<p>Create a circle using elliptical shape tool. Apply stoke layer style.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-snake/cartton_snake-02.jpg" alt="" width="341" height="328" /></p>
<p>Create an ellipse for the eye using elliptical shape tool. Create a circle          for the eyeball using elliptical shape tool. Press Ctrl+Alt+G to create          a clipping mask.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-snake/cartton_snake-03.jpg" alt="" width="341" height="328" /></p>
<p>Create a very tiny circle inside the eyeball. Duplicate these three layers.          Select and rotate these three layers to create the other eye. You can          resize the eyeball to break the monotony of uniformity.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-snake/cartton_snake-04.jpg" alt="" width="341" height="328" /></p>
<p>Using pen tool create teeth and tongue. Color them as shown below.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-snake/cartton_snake-05.jpg" alt="" width="341" height="328" /></p>
<p>Create a rectangle using rectangular shape tool. Press Ctrl+T. Right          Click and select Warp. Adjust the nodes to get the shape as shown.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-snake/cartton_snake-06.jpg" alt="" width="341" height="328" /></p>
<p>Enable add to shape area from the top bar. Again create a rectangle and          warp it to get shape shown below.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-snake/cartton_snake-07.jpg" alt="" width="341" height="328" /></p>
<p>Repeat the above steps to create a complete snake body.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-snake/cartton_snake-08.jpg" alt="" width="341" height="328" /></p>
<p>Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as          shown.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-snake/cartton_snake-09.jpg" alt="" width="419" height="380" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-snake/cartton_snake-10.jpg" alt="" width="347" height="330" /></p>
<p>Create a dark green circle. Apply stroke layer style. Press Ctrl+Alt+G          to create a clipping mask. Press Alt key and drag this circle layer to          create it&#8217;s more duplicate that are automatically clip masked.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-snake/cartton_snake-11.jpg" alt="" width="347" height="330" /></p>
<p>Using pen tool and brush tool create eye brows and nostrils etc. Also          create two circles for the nose.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-snake/cartton_snake-12.jpg" alt="" width="347" height="334" /></p>
<p>Select and merge all layers. Duplicate layer. Enable lock transparent          pixels from layer palette. Fill it with black color. Press Ctrl+T. Right          click the layer and select distort. Adjust nodes to create a perspective          shadow. Reduce opacity.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/drawing-a-cartoon-snake/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Creating disco loops abstract background effect</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/creating-disco-loops-abstract-background-effect/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/creating-disco-loops-abstract-background-effect/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 18:45:52 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Lessons]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[background effect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[disco loops]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photo effect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photoshop tutorial]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=806</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/creating-disco-loops-abstract-background-effect/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/background_effect_11-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="background_effect_11" title="background_effect_11" /></a>Start by creating a new file with black as background color. Select gradient tool. Create a gradient as shown below. Select radial mode as gradient style. Change gradient mode to screen on options bar at top. Create a new layer and apply this gradient. Apply this gradient several times as shown below. Change the layer mode to &#8220;Color Dodge&#8221;. Repeat the above steps again to create more disco loops. Create duplicate of both disco layers and merge the duplicate layers. From &#8220;Filter&#8221; menu select &#8220;Distort&#62;&#62;Wave&#8221;. Apply settings as shown. Press Ctrl+U to open hue/saturation window. Apply settings as shown. Change the layer mode to &#8220;Screen&#8221;.]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-807" title="background_effect_11" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/background_effect_11-150x150.jpg" alt="background_effect_11" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Start by creating a new file with black as background color. Select gradient          tool. Create a gradient as shown below.<span id="more-806"></span></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/abstract-circles/background_effect_01.jpg" alt="" width="394" height="139" /></p>
<p>Select radial mode as gradient style. Change gradient mode to screen          on options bar at top.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/abstract-circles/background_effect_02.jpg" alt="" width="341" height="218" /></p>
<p>Create a new layer and apply this gradient.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/abstract-circles/background_effect_03.jpg" alt="" width="491" height="485" /></p>
<p>Apply this gradient several times as shown below.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/abstract-circles/background_effect_04.jpg" alt="" width="491" height="485" /></p>
<p>Change the layer mode to &#8220;Color Dodge&#8221;.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/abstract-circles/background_effect_05.jpg" alt="" width="453" height="351" /></p>
<p>Repeat the above steps again to create more disco loops.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/abstract-circles/background_effect_06.jpg" alt="" width="500" height="500" /></p>
<p>Create duplicate of both disco layers and merge the duplicate layers.          From &#8220;Filter&#8221; menu select &#8220;Distort&gt;&gt;Wave&#8221;. Apply settings as shown.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/abstract-circles/background_effect_08.jpg" alt="" width="429" height="400" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/abstract-circles/background_effect_08a.jpg" alt="" width="500" height="500" /></p>
<p>Press Ctrl+U to open hue/saturation window. Apply settings as shown.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/abstract-circles/background_effect_09.jpg" alt="" width="407" height="311" /></p>
<p>Change the layer mode to &#8220;Screen&#8221;.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/abstract-circles/background_effect_10.jpg" alt="" width="345" height="285" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/abstract-circles/background_effect_11.jpg" alt="" width="494" height="495" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/creating-disco-loops-abstract-background-effect/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Creating a cute girlie smiley</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/creating-a-cute-girlie-smiley/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/creating-a-cute-girlie-smiley/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 18:44:03 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Lessons]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[girlie smiley]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photoshop tutorial]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=803</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/creating-a-cute-girlie-smiley/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/smiley_17.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="smiley_17" title="smiley_17" /></a>Start by creating a circle using elliptical shape tool. Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as shown. Create an elliptical selection using elliptical marquee tool. Create a new layer. Apply Black to white gradient. Change layer mode to screen for this layer. Duplicate the layer. Press Ctrl+T. Right click and select Flip Vertical and place on the other side. Change layer mode to &#8220;Color Burn&#8221; for this layer. Create an ellipse using elliptical shape tool. Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as shown. Create a gray ellipse for the eye ball and a smaller black ellipse placed right above it. Apply bevel &#38; emboss layer style on the black ellipse. Select and duplicate all the eye layers. Press Ctrl+T. Right click and select Flip Horizontal and place on the other side. Create eyelashes using pen tool. Using brush tool create lips. Create a triangular shape using polygon shape tool. Apply some gradient. Ctrl+Click to get the selection. Contract the selection by 1 pixels. Create a new layer. Apply Black to white gradient. Change layer mode to screen for this layer. Complete the hair band as shown below. Create her pony [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-804" title="smiley_17" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/smiley_17.jpg" alt="smiley_17" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Start by creating a circle using elliptical shape tool.<span id="more-803"></span></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/girlie-smiley/smiley_01.jpg" alt="" width="153" height="140" /></p>
<p>Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as          shown.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/girlie-smiley/smiley_02.jpg" alt="" width="436" height="382" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/girlie-smiley/smiley_03.jpg" alt="" width="436" height="382" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/girlie-smiley/smiley_04.jpg" alt="" width="134" height="142" /></p>
<p>Create an elliptical selection using elliptical marquee tool. Create          a new layer. Apply Black to white gradient. Change layer mode to screen          for this layer.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/girlie-smiley/smiley_05.jpg" alt="" width="134" height="142" /></p>
<p>Duplicate the layer. Press Ctrl+T. Right click and select Flip Vertical          and place on the other side. Change layer mode to &#8220;Color Burn&#8221;          for this layer.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/girlie-smiley/smiley_06.jpg" alt="" width="134" height="142" /></p>
<p>Create an ellipse using elliptical shape tool.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/girlie-smiley/smiley_07.jpg" alt="" width="134" height="142" /></p>
<p>Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as          shown.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/girlie-smiley/smiley_08.jpg" alt="" width="419" height="379" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/girlie-smiley/smiley_09.jpg" alt="" width="419" height="379" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/girlie-smiley/smiley_10.jpg" alt="" width="130" height="123" /></p>
<p>Create a gray ellipse for the eye ball and a smaller black ellipse placed          right above it. Apply bevel &amp; emboss layer style on the black ellipse.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/girlie-smiley/smiley_11.jpg" alt="" width="130" height="123" /></p>
<p>Select and duplicate all the eye layers. Press Ctrl+T. Right click and          select Flip Horizontal and place on the other side. Create eyelashes using          pen tool.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/girlie-smiley/smiley_12.jpg" alt="" width="130" height="123" /></p>
<p>Using brush tool create lips.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/girlie-smiley/smiley_13.jpg" alt="" width="130" height="123" /></p>
<p>Create a triangular shape using polygon shape tool. Apply some gradient.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/girlie-smiley/smiley_14.jpg" alt="" width="130" height="123" /></p>
<p>Ctrl+Click to get the selection. Contract the selection by 1 pixels.          Create a new layer. Apply Black to white gradient. Change layer mode to          screen for this layer.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/girlie-smiley/smiley_15.jpg" alt="" width="170" height="149" /></p>
<p>Complete the hair band as shown below.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/girlie-smiley/smiley_16.jpg" alt="" width="170" height="149" /></p>
<p>Create her pony tail using brush tool.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/girlie-smiley/smiley_17.jpg" alt="" width="138" height="137" /></p>
<p>Create an elliptical selection using elliptical marquee tool. Press Alt+Ctrl+D          to feather the selection. Create a new layer and fill with gray color.          Move this layer below all the layers in layer order in layer palette.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/creating-a-cute-girlie-smiley/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Web Content Box</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/web-content-box/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/web-content-box/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 18:42:28 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Lessons]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photoshop tutorial]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Web Content Box]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=800</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/web-content-box/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/cb17-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="cb17" title="cb17" /></a>Create a stylish content box for your websites. Create a new file of 300&#215;300 dpi. Create a new layer by pressing shift+control+n together. Use polygonal lasso tool to draw a selection. Fill the selection with #646464. Keep the selection active. Go to Select&#62;Modify&#62;Contract and contract it 3 pixels. Create another layer. Set the foreground color to #646464 and background to #C4C4C3. Use linear gradient to fill the shape. Go to filter&#62;noise&#62;add noise and apply these values. Image after applying noise filter. Now, go to filter&#62;blurs&#62;motion blur and apply these settings. Also add default bevel &#38; emboss effect in the layer. Image after applying motion blur and bevel &#38; emboss :- Create a black color rectange with rectangle tool. Apply these layer styles in it. Image after applying above layer styles. Select the portion of rectangle with rectangular marquee tool. Press delete. Press shift+control+n to create a new layer. Set #FE0202 as foreground and #920C0C as background color. Select gradient tool and fill the selection with it. Create another layer. Draw a white color line over the layer. Duplicate and move the white line below the shape. Group &#38; merge these three layers. Duplicate and place the layer as shown in [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<h2 style="font-size: 14px; color: #090964;"><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-801" title="cb17" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/cb17-150x150.jpg" alt="cb17" width="100" height="100" /></h2>
<h2 style="font-size: 14px; color: #090964;">Create a stylish content box for your websites.</h2>
<div>Create a new file of 300&#215;300 dpi.<br />
Create a new layer by pressing shift+control+n together. Use polygonal lasso tool to draw a selection.<span id="more-800"></span></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/content-box/cb1.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>Fill the selection with #646464.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/content-box/cb2.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>Keep the selection active. Go to Select&gt;Modify&gt;Contract and contract it 3 pixels.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/content-box/cb3.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>Create another layer. Set the foreground color to #646464 and background to #C4C4C3. Use linear gradient to fill the shape.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/content-box/cb4.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>Go to filter&gt;noise&gt;add noise and apply these values.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/content-box/cb5.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>Image after applying noise filter.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/content-box/cb6.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>Now, go to filter&gt;blurs&gt;motion blur and apply these settings.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/content-box/cb7.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>Also add default bevel &amp; emboss effect in the layer. Image after applying motion blur and bevel &amp; emboss :-</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/content-box/cb8.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>Create a black color rectange with rectangle tool.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/content-box/cb9.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>Apply these layer styles in it.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/content-box/cb10.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/content-box/cb11.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>Image after applying above layer styles.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/content-box/cb12.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>Select the portion of rectangle with rectangular marquee tool. Press delete.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/content-box/c13.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>Press shift+control+n to create a new layer. Set #FE0202 as foreground and #920C0C as background color. Select gradient tool and fill the selection with it.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/content-box/cb13.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>Create another layer. Draw a white color line over the layer. Duplicate and move the white line below the shape.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/content-box/cb14.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>Group &amp; merge these three layers. Duplicate and place the layer as shown in the figure.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/content-box/cb15.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>Add bevel &amp; emboss effect in it.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/content-box/cb16.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>Image after applying bevel &amp; emboss effect.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/content-box/cb17.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>Now, duplicate the layer and add text in it. Our content box is ready <img src='http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-includes/images/smilies/icon_smile.gif' alt=':)' class='wp-smiley' /> </div>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/web-content-box/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Drawing a cartoon bulb</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/drawing-a-cartoon-bulb/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/drawing-a-cartoon-bulb/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 18:40:41 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Lessons]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[cartoon bulb]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=798</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/drawing-a-cartoon-bulb/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/bulb_15-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="bulb_15" title="bulb_15" /></a>Start by applying an orange to white gradient in radial mode to the background layer. Create an ellipse using elliptical shape tool. Enable add to shape area from the top bar. Create a rectangle using rectangular shape tool. Press Ctrl+T. Right Click and select Warp. Adjust the nodes to get the shape as shown. Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as shown. Ctrl+Click to get the selection. Contract the selection by 3 pixels. Create a new layer. Apply Black to white gradient in radial mode. Change layer mode to &#8220;linear light&#8221; for this layer. Select eraser tool. Take a soft brush setting and remove the lower black portion of this layer. Create an ellipse using elliptical shape tool. Rotate a bit. Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as shown. Create a circle for the eyeball using elliptical shape tool. Press Ctrl+Alt+G to create a clipping mask. Apply stroke layer style on eyeball too. Select eye and eyeball layers. Duplicate the layers. Press Ctrl+T. Right click and select Flip Horizontal and place for the other eye. Using pen tool create other facial features like eyebrows, nose and lips. Create a rectangle [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-797" title="bulb_15" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/bulb_15-150x150.jpg" alt="bulb_15" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Start by applying an orange to white gradient in radial mode to the background          layer.</p>
<p><span id="more-798"></span></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-bulb/bulb_01.jpg" alt="" width="257" height="263" /></p>
<p>Create an ellipse using elliptical shape tool.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-bulb/bulb_02.jpg" alt="" width="259" height="263" /></p>
<p>Enable add to shape area from the top bar. Create a rectangle using rectangular          shape tool. Press Ctrl+T. Right Click and select Warp. Adjust the nodes          to get the shape as shown.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-bulb/bulb_03.jpg" alt="" width="259" height="263" /></p>
<p>Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as          shown.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-bulb/bulb_04.jpg" alt="" width="419" height="381" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-bulb/bulb_05.jpg" alt="" width="419" height="381" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-bulb/bulb_06.jpg" alt="" width="261" height="257" /></p>
<p>Ctrl+Click to get the selection. Contract the selection by 3 pixels.          Create a new layer. Apply Black to white gradient in radial mode. Change          layer mode to &#8220;linear light&#8221; for this layer.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-bulb/bulb_07.jpg" alt="" width="335" height="320" /></p>
<p>Select eraser tool. Take a soft brush setting and remove the lower black          portion of this layer.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-bulb/bulb_08.jpg" alt="" width="258" height="264" /></p>
<p>Create an ellipse using elliptical shape tool. Rotate a bit.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-bulb/bulb_09.jpg" alt="" width="258" height="264" /></p>
<p>Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as          shown.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-bulb/bulb_10.jpg" alt="" width="423" height="383" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-bulb/bulb_11.jpg" alt="" width="423" height="383" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-bulb/bulb_12.jpg" alt="" width="182" height="208" /></p>
<p>Create a circle for the eyeball using elliptical shape tool. Press Ctrl+Alt+G          to create a clipping mask. Apply stroke layer style on eyeball too.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-bulb/bulb_13.jpg" alt="" width="182" height="208" /></p>
<p>Select eye and eyeball layers. Duplicate the layers. Press Ctrl+T. Right          click and select Flip Horizontal and place for the other eye.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-bulb/bulb_14.jpg" alt="" width="182" height="208" /></p>
<p>Using pen tool create other facial features like eyebrows, nose and lips.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/cartoon-bulb/bulb_15.jpg" alt="" width="182" height="208" /></p>
<p>Create a rectangle using rectangular shape tool. Press Ctrl+T. Right          Click and select Warp. Adjust the nodes to create a slightly curved bottom.          Using pen tool create a swoosh shape as shown below. Duplicate twice and          place below each other.</p>
<p><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[
google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828";
/* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Bright Blue Links */
google_ad_slot = "1664596184";
google_ad_width = 336;
google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[
google_protectAndRun("ads_core.google_render_ad", google_handleError, google_render_ad);
// ]]&gt;</script><ins style="border: medium none; margin: 0pt; padding: 0pt; display: inline-table; height: 280px; position: relative; visibility: visible; width: 336px;"><ins style="border: medium none; margin: 0pt; padding: 0pt; display: block; height: 280px; position: relative; visibility: visible; width: 336px;"></ins></ins></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/drawing-a-cartoon-bulb/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Creating Windows XP look building icon</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/creating-windows-xp-look-building-icon/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/creating-windows-xp-look-building-icon/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 18:35:18 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Lessons]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[building icon]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photoshop tutorial]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=794</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/creating-windows-xp-look-building-icon/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/building_icon_12-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="building_icon_12" title="building_icon_12" /></a>Start by creating Create a rectangle using rectangular shape tool. Press Ctrl+T. Right Click and select perspective. Adjust the nodes to get the shape as shown. Apply a gradient overlay layer style. Similarly create the other side. Create a rectangle using rectangular shape tool. Press Ctrl+T. Right Click and select distort. Adjust the nodes to get the shape of ground as shown below. Press and hold Alt key and keep pressing down arrow key to create 3D extrusion. Select and merge duplicate layers. Move this layer below all the layers in layer order in layer palette. Change it&#8217;s color. Select the building face layer with gradient overlay style. Create it&#8217;s duplicate and scale down. Remove the layer style. Enable &#8220;subtract from shape area&#8221; at the top bar. Create some lines using line tool. Similarly create some horizontal lines as shown below. Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as shown. Select the building face layer with gradient overlay style. Ctrl+Click the layer thumbnail to get the selection. From select menu select modify&#62;&#62;contract. Contract the selection by a few pixels. Create a new layer and apply a white to transparent gradient. Move this layer above all the [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-795" title="building_icon_12" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/building_icon_12-150x150.jpg" alt="building_icon_12" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>Start by creating Create a rectangle using rectangular shape tool. Press          Ctrl+T. Right Click and select perspective. Adjust the nodes to get the          shape as shown.<span id="more-794"></span></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/building-icon/building_icon_01.jpg" alt="" width="114" height="153" /></p>
<p>Apply a gradient overlay layer style.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/building-icon/building_icon_02.jpg" alt="" width="114" height="153" /></p>
<p>Similarly create the other side.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/building-icon/building_icon_03.jpg" alt="" width="114" height="153" /></p>
<p>Create a rectangle using rectangular shape tool. Press Ctrl+T. Right          Click and select distort. Adjust the nodes to get the shape of ground          as shown below.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/building-icon/building_icon_04.jpg" alt="" width="136" height="111" /></p>
<p>Press and hold Alt key and keep pressing down arrow key to create 3D          extrusion. Select and merge duplicate layers. Move this layer below all          the layers in layer order in layer palette. Change it&#8217;s color.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/building-icon/building_icon_05.jpg" alt="" width="136" height="111" /></p>
<p>Select the building face layer with gradient overlay style. Create it&#8217;s          duplicate and scale down.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/building-icon/building_icon_06.jpg" alt="" width="206" height="281" /></p>
<p>Remove the layer style. Enable &#8220;subtract from shape area&#8221; at the top          bar. Create some lines using line tool.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/building-icon/building_icon_07.jpg" alt="" width="206" height="281" /></p>
<p>Similarly create some horizontal lines as shown below.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/building-icon/building_icon_08.jpg" alt="" width="206" height="281" /></p>
<p>Double click the layer to open layer style window. Apply settings as          shown.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/building-icon/building_icon_09.jpg" alt="" width="421" height="380" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/building-icon/building_icon_10.jpg" alt="" width="206" height="281" /></p>
<p>Select the building face layer with gradient overlay style. Ctrl+Click          the layer thumbnail to get the selection. From select menu select modify&gt;&gt;contract.          Contract the selection by a few pixels. Create a new layer and apply a          white to transparent gradient. Move this layer above all the layers in          layer order in layer palette.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/building-icon/building_icon_11.jpg" alt="" width="262" height="191" /></p>
<p>Similarly create the other face of the building as shown.</p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/tutorials/building-icon/building_icon_12.jpg" alt="" width="262" height="191" /></p>
<p>Create more building with different sizes and colors. Place as shown          below.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/creating-windows-xp-look-building-icon/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Warped Text</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/warped-text/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/warped-text/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 18:33:50 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Lessons]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photoshop tutorial]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Warped Text]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=791</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/warped-text/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/warpedtxt-150x134.gif" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="warpedtxt" title="warpedtxt" /></a>Create warped stylized text effects on any font. 1. Open a New Document in Photoshop. Set the dimensions to 500&#215;300 to give you a decent workable space to type in text. 2. Select the Type Tool and type something on the canvas. For this example, the words &#8220;Warped Text&#8221; were used. 3. Goto Filter &#62; Liquify (select OK, when photoshop asks if you want to rasterize the layer). 4. When the Liquify screen appears, select a large brush size and begin pushing the text around to make it appear warped or crazy looking. 5. Double click the text layer to open the Blending Properties dialog box. 6. You are done! (Feel free to apply any other filters, blending properties, or style that you want to give it).]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<h2 style="font-size: 14px; color: #090964;"><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-792" title="warpedtxt" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/warpedtxt-150x134.gif" alt="warpedtxt" width="100" height="90" /></h2>
<h2 style="font-size: 14px; color: #090964;">Create warped stylized text effects on any font.</h2>
<p>1. Open a New Document in Photoshop. Set the dimensions to 500&#215;300 to give you a decent workable space to type in text. 2. Select the Type Tool and type something on the canvas. For this example, the words &#8220;Warped Text&#8221; were used. <span id="more-791"></span></p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/warpedtext/image01.gif" alt="" /></p>
<hr />3. Goto Filter &gt; Liquify (select OK, when photoshop asks if you want to rasterize the layer).</p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/warpedtext/image02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<hr />4. When the Liquify screen appears, select a large brush size and begin pushing the text around to make it appear warped or crazy looking.</p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/warpedtext/image03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<hr />5. Double click the text layer to open the Blending Properties dialog box.</p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/warpedtext/image04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<hr />6. You are done! (Feel free to apply any other filters, blending properties, or style that you want to give it).</p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/warpedtext/image05.gif" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/warped-text/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Paint Stroke Border Effect</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/paint-stroke-border-effect/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/paint-stroke-border-effect/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 18:31:45 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Lessons]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Border Effect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Paint Stroke]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photoshop tutorial]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=788</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/paint-stroke-border-effect/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/paintstroke-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="paintstroke" title="paintstroke" /></a>Creat a paint stroke border for your images and photos. 1. Open a New Document in Photoshop and paste your image in a separate layer above. Be sure that the image is smaller than the background, so that you have a white border. 2. Choose the Rectangular Marquee Tool and make a square selection on the outside of your image. 3. Goto Select &#62; Inverse to inverse the selection. 4. Click the &#8220;Edit in Quick Mask Mode&#8221; toggle button. 5. The image will turn a transparent red. 6. Goto Filter &#62; Liquify. 7. Select a large brush size brush and begin pushing the boundries of the box in and out so that it looks like a paint brush mark. 8. Click ok to close &#8220;Liquify&#8221; and accept the new shaped mask. 9. Click the &#8220;Edit in Standard Mode&#8221; button. 10. You should now have a paint brush stroke selection. 11. Click the Delete key and you should now have your new paint brush shape border. 8. You can add some extra pizzaz to it by giving it a shadow.]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<h2 style="font-size: 14px; color: #090964;"><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-789" title="paintstroke" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/paintstroke-150x150.jpg" alt="paintstroke" width="100" height="100" /></h2>
<h2 style="font-size: 14px; color: #090964;">Creat a paint stroke border for your images and photos.</h2>
<p>1. Open a New Document in Photoshop and paste your image in a separate layer above. Be sure that the image is smaller than the background, so that you have a white border.<span id="more-788"></span></p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/brushstroke/image01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<hr />2. Choose the Rectangular Marquee Tool and make a square selection on the outside of your image.</p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/brushstroke/image02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<hr />3. Goto Select &gt; Inverse to inverse the selection.</p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/brushstroke/image03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<hr />4. Click the &#8220;Edit in Quick Mask Mode&#8221; toggle button.</p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/brushstroke/image04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<hr />5. The image will turn a transparent red.</p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/brushstroke/image05.gif" alt="" /></p>
<hr />6. Goto Filter &gt; Liquify.</p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/brushstroke/image06.gif" alt="" /></p>
<hr />7. Select a large brush size brush and begin pushing the boundries of the box in and out so that it looks like a paint brush mark.</p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/brushstroke/image07.gif" alt="" /></p>
<hr />8. Click ok to close &#8220;Liquify&#8221; and accept the new shaped mask. 9. Click the &#8220;Edit in Standard Mode&#8221; button.</p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/brushstroke/image08.gif" alt="" /></p>
<hr />10. You should now have a paint brush stroke selection.</p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/brushstroke/image09.gif" alt="" /></p>
<hr />11. Click the Delete key and you should now have your new paint brush shape border.</p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/brushstroke/image10.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<hr />8. You can add some extra pizzaz to it by giving it a shadow.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/paint-stroke-border-effect/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Dramatic Black &amp; White Photos</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/dramatic-black-white-photos/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/dramatic-black-white-photos/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 18:30:07 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Lessons]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Dramatic Photos]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=785</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/dramatic-black-white-photos/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/dramaticBW-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="dramaticBW" title="dramaticBW" /></a>Create dramatic black and white photos by splashing in color. 1. Open a color photo in Photoshop. 2. Duplicate the layer by dragging the layer to the &#8220;Create a New Layer&#8221; icon in the layers palette (or CTRL+J). 3. With the new layer selected, goto Image &#62; Adjustments &#62; Desaturate (or Shift+CTRL+U). 4. Goto Image &#62; Adjustments &#62; Brightness/Contrast and adjust the levels for each so that the black &#38; white photo looks pleasing to your eye. 5. Now select the Eraser tool and erase whatever areas you want color. In this example, I erased the flower so that it&#8217;s color would shine through.]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<h2 style="font-size: 14px; color: #090964;"><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-786" title="dramaticBW" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/dramaticBW-150x150.jpg" alt="dramaticBW" width="100" height="100" /></h2>
<h2 style="font-size: 14px; color: #090964;">Create dramatic black and white photos by splashing in color.</h2>
<p>1. Open a color photo in Photoshop. <span id="more-785"></span></p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/dramatic/image01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<hr />2. Duplicate the layer by dragging the layer to the &#8220;Create a New Layer&#8221; icon in the layers palette (or CTRL+J).</p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/dramatic/image02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<hr />3. With the new layer selected, goto Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Desaturate (or Shift+CTRL+U).</p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/dramatic/image03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<hr />4. Goto Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Brightness/Contrast and adjust the levels for each so that the black &amp; white photo looks pleasing to your eye.</p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/dramatic/image04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<hr />5. Now select the Eraser tool and erase whatever areas you want color. In this example, I erased the flower so that it&#8217;s color would shine through.</p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/dramatic/image05.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p><img src="http://yowussup.com/dramatic/image06.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/dramatic-black-white-photos/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Wrapping Objects</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/wrapping-objects/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/wrapping-objects/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 18:13:31 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Lessons]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photoshop tutorial]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[wrapping objects]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=782</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/wrapping-objects/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/wrap_image-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="wrap_image" title="wrap_image" /></a>Use photoshop&#8217;s liquify filter to wrap text and shapes around objects. 1. Open a photo of an object (in this case, we&#8217;ll use a coffee mug). 2. Type some text on a new layer. For the example of this tutorial, we&#8217;ll type the word &#8220;Wrapped&#8221;. 3. Right mouse click the text layer and select &#8220;Rasterize Type&#8221;. 4. Goto Filter &#62; Liquify. 5. On the liquify screen, select the &#8220;Backdrop&#8221; check box so that you can get a look at how the text relates to the cup (or object). 6. Using a brush size that is appropriate for the text, begin shaping the text so that it adheres to the underlying object. 7. When you are done adjusting, click OK to accept the changes and you should now have your text wrapped on your object. This same technique is not exclusive to text, it can be applied to graphics, paintings, and line-art as well.]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<h2 style="font-size: 14px; color: #090964;"><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-783" title="wrap_image" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/wrap_image-150x150.jpg" alt="wrap_image" width="100" height="100" /></h2>
<h2 style="font-size: 14px; color: #090964;">Use photoshop&#8217;s liquify filter to wrap text and shapes around objects.</h2>
<p>1. Open a photo of an object (in this case, we&#8217;ll use a coffee mug).<span id="more-782"></span></p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/wrappingobject/image01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<hr />2. Type some text on a new layer. For the example of this tutorial, we&#8217;ll type the word &#8220;Wrapped&#8221;.</p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/wrappingobject/image02.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<hr />3. Right mouse click the text layer and select &#8220;Rasterize Type&#8221;.</p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/wrappingobject/image03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<hr />4. Goto Filter &gt; Liquify.</p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/wrappingobject/image04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<hr />5. On the liquify screen, select the &#8220;Backdrop&#8221; check box so that you can get a look at how the text relates to the cup (or object).</p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/wrappingobject/image05.gif" alt="" /></p>
<hr />6. Using a brush size that is appropriate for the text, begin shaping the text so that it adheres to the underlying object.</p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/wrappingobject/image06.gif" alt="" /></p>
<hr />7. When you are done adjusting, click OK to accept the changes and you should now have your text wrapped on your object. This same technique is not exclusive to text, it can be applied to graphics, paintings, and line-art as well.</p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/wrappingobject/image07.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/wrapping-objects/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Pixelating Images</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/pixelating-images/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/pixelating-images/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 18:11:49 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>Kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Lessons]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[pixelation effect]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://alltutorials.cashfiles.net/?p=779</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/pixelating-images/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/pixelated1-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="pixelated1" title="pixelated1" /></a>Apply a simple pixelation effect to any photo or image in Photoshop. 1. Open the image you want to pixelate in Photoshop. 2. Duplicate the layer by dragging the layer to the &#8220;Create a New Layer&#8221; icon in the layers palette (or CTRL+J). 3. With the copied layer selected, go to Filter &#62; Texture &#62; Patchwork. 4. On the Patchwork pop-up screen, change to the following values: Square Size: 1 Relief: 0 5. You&#8217;re done. You should now have a pixelated version of your image.]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<h2 style="font-size: 14px; color: #090964;"><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-780" title="pixelated1" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/pixelated1-150x150.jpg" alt="pixelated1" width="100" height="100" /></h2>
<h2 style="font-size: 14px; color: #090964;">Apply a simple pixelation effect to any photo or image in Photoshop.</h2>
<p>1. Open the image you want to pixelate in Photoshop.<span id="more-779"></span></p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/pixelate/image01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<hr />2. Duplicate the layer by dragging the layer to the &#8220;Create a New Layer&#8221; icon in the layers palette (or CTRL+J).</p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/pixelate/image02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<hr />3. With the copied layer selected, go to Filter &gt; Texture &gt; Patchwork.</p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/pixelate/image03.gif" alt="" /></p>
<hr />4. On the Patchwork pop-up screen, change to the following values:<br />
Square Size: 1<br />
Relief: 0</p>
<hr /><img src="http://yowussup.com/pixelate/image04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<hr />5. You&#8217;re done. You should now have a pixelated version of your image.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photoshop-tutorials-and-lessons/pixelating-images/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Blood Soaked Eyes &#8211; Photoshop Tutorial</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/blood-soaked-eyes-photoshop-tutorial/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/blood-soaked-eyes-photoshop-tutorial/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 13 Sep 2009 18:20:46 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Manipulation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Blood Soaked Eyes]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photoshop tutorial]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://photoshopfacelift.cashfiles.net/?p=100</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/blood-soaked-eyes-photoshop-tutorial/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/08/bloodeyes16-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="bloodeyes16" title="bloodeyes16" /></a>This is a great effect. It always reminds me of the scene from the movie &#8220;24 Hour Photo&#8221; when Robin Williams is standing in the aisle at the supermarket with his eyes closed. When he opens them, they are filled with blood. Very freaky! Instructions: 1. Open a photo that has eyes in it in Photoshop. 2. Click the &#8220;Edit in Quick Mask Mode&#8221; button (or press Q). 3. Choose black from the swatches palette and select the Paint Brush Tool. Begin coloring in the eyes (when in Quick Mask Mode, your paint brush will paint a transparent red to indicate the masked area). 4. When the eyes are completely colored in, select &#8220;Edit in Standard Mode&#8221; button to exit Quick Mask mode. 5. Goto Select &#62; Inverse to inverse the selection so that only the eyes are selected. 6. Goto Image &#62; Adjustments &#62; Color Balance. 7. Adjust the Red sliders under the Shadows and Midtones sections to add red to the selected eyes of the photo. 8. You should now have the entire eyes, including the cornea, filled with red. 9. Create a new layer and name it &#8220;Blood&#8221;. 10. Choose red from the swatches palette and select [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-563" title="bloodeyes16" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/08/bloodeyes16-150x150.jpg" alt="bloodeyes16" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>This is a great effect. It always reminds me of the scene from the movie &#8220;24 Hour Photo&#8221; when Robin Williams is standing in the aisle at the supermarket with his eyes closed. When he opens them, they are filled with blood. Very freaky!<span id="more-564"></span><br />
<strong>Instructions:</strong><br />
1. Open a photo that has eyes in it in Photoshop.<br />
<img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/blood-eyes/image01.jpg" alt="" /><br />
2. Click the &#8220;Edit in Quick Mask Mode&#8221; button (or press Q).<br />
<img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/blood-eyes/image02.gif" alt="" /><br />
3. Choose black from the swatches palette and select the Paint Brush Tool. Begin coloring in the eyes (when in Quick Mask Mode, your paint brush will paint a transparent red to indicate the masked area).<br />
<img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/blood-eyes/image03.jpg" alt="" /><br />
4. When the eyes are completely colored in, select &#8220;Edit in Standard Mode&#8221; button to exit Quick Mask mode.<br />
<img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/blood-eyes/image04.gif" alt="" /><br />
5. Goto Select &gt; Inverse to inverse the selection so that only the eyes are selected.<br />
<img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/blood-eyes/image04a.gif" alt="" /><br />
6. Goto Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Color Balance.<br />
<img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/blood-eyes/image05.gif" alt="" /><br />
7. Adjust the Red sliders under the Shadows and Midtones sections to add red to the selected eyes of the photo.<br />
<img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/blood-eyes/image05a.gif" alt="" /><br />
8. You should now have the entire eyes, including the cornea, filled with red.<br />
<img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/blood-eyes/image06.jpg" alt="" /><br />
9. Create a new layer and name it &#8220;Blood&#8221;.<br />
<img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/blood-eyes/image07.gif" alt="" /><br />
10. Choose red from the swatches palette and select the Paint Brush tool. Set the opacity of the brush to 20%.<br />
<img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/blood-eyes/image07a.gif" alt="" /><br />
11. Begin coloring over the entire surface of the eye. Be sure not to lift up your brush as you paint over each eye so that it has an even opacity.<br />
<img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/blood-eyes/image08.jpg" alt="" /><br />
12. Create a new layer and name it &#8220;Drip&#8221;.<br />
<img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/blood-eyes/image10.gif" alt="" /><br />
13. Choose a dark red color from the swatches palette and select the Paint Brush tool. Be sure that the opacity is set back to 100%. Then color in the drips of the blood at the bottom edge of the eyes.<br />
<img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/blood-eyes/image11.jpg" alt="" /><br />
14. Now choose a lighter shade of the same red and color the highlights on the drips.<br />
<img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/blood-eyes/image12.jpg" alt="" /><br />
15. Goto the Drip Layer, right click it and select &#8220;Blending Options&#8221;.<br />
<img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/blood-eyes/image14.gif" alt="" /><br />
16. Select the Drop Shadow checkbox and set to the following values or until the shadow behind the blood drip looks convincing.<br />
<img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/blood-eyes/image15.gif" alt="" /><br />
17. You are now done! You should have blood soaked eyes with a light shadow behind the drips for emphasis.<br />
<img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/blood-eyes/image16.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/blood-soaked-eyes-photoshop-tutorial/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Create a Symmetrical Face</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/create-a-symmetrical-face/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/create-a-symmetrical-face/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 13 Sep 2009 18:19:17 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Manipulation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Create Symmetrical Face]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photo effect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photoshop tutorials]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://photoshopfacelift.cashfiles.net/?p=97</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/create-a-symmetrical-face/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/08/simmetric06-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="simmetric06" title="simmetric06" /></a>It&#8217;s common knowledge that our faces are not perfectly symmetrical and in some cases, we can see this just by looking closely in the mirror. However, wouldn&#8217;t it be interesting to see what your face looks like if it were perfectly symmetrical? You might be suprised how different your face would look. Some have said that the resulting image looks like they would be their brother or sister, so it makes a great prank to do this to your friend&#8217;s photo and send it to them via email telling them that you may have found their long lost brother or sister. Below, you will find a simple tutorial on how to take a photo of a person&#8217;s face and make it symmetrical. Have fun! Instructions: 1. Open an image of a person’s face in Photoshop. The photo of the face has to be facing forward looking directly at the camera (3/4 or profile will not work for this tutorial). 2. Make sure that you photo is on it&#8217;s own layer above a white background. 2. Select the “Rectangular Marquee Tool” and select half the screen. Make sure that you the selection goes right down the middle of the face. Use [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-561" title="simmetric06" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/08/simmetric06-150x150.jpg" alt="simmetric06" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>It&#8217;s common knowledge that our faces are not perfectly symmetrical and in some cases, we can see this just by looking closely in the mirror. However, wouldn&#8217;t it be interesting to see what your face looks like if it were perfectly symmetrical? You might be suprised how different your face would look.<span id="more-562"></span></p>
<p>Some have said that the resulting image looks like they would be their brother or sister, so it makes a great prank to do this to your friend&#8217;s photo and send it to them via email telling them that you may have found their long lost brother or sister.</p>
<p>Below, you will find a simple tutorial on how to take a photo of a person&#8217;s face and make it symmetrical. Have fun!<br />
<strong>Instructions:</strong><br />
1. Open an image of a person’s face in Photoshop. The photo of the face has to be facing forward looking directly at the camera (3/4 or profile will not work for this tutorial).<br />
<img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/symmetrical-face/image01.jpg" alt="" /><br />
2. Make sure that you photo is on it&#8217;s own layer above a white background.<br />
<img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/symmetrical-face/image02.gif" alt="" /><br />
2. Select the “Rectangular Marquee Tool” and select half the screen. Make sure that you the selection goes right down the middle of the face. Use the tip of the nose as a reference point for the halfway mark.<br />
<img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/symmetrical-face/image03.jpg" alt="" /><br />
3. Click the “Delete” key to remove one half of the face.<br />
4. Duplicate the layer of this “half face” by dragging the layer to the &#8220;Create a New Layer&#8221; icon in the layers palette (or CTRL+J). <img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/symmetrical-face/image04.gif" alt="" /><br />
5. With the new top layer selected, goto Edit &gt; Transform &gt; Flip Horizontal.<br />
<img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/symmetrical-face/image05.gif" alt="" /><br />
6. Select the Move tool. Holding down the Shift key, drag the top layer so that it matches with the underlying layer and creates your symmetrical face.<br />
<img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/symmetrical-face/image06.jpg" alt="" /><br />
7. Last thing to do is get rid of the symmetrical hair. To do this, simply copy and paste the hair from the original photo onto a new layer in your symmetrical face photo.<br />
8. You may need to use the Free Transform option (CTRL + T) to get the hair to fit the shape of the head.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/create-a-symmetrical-face/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Nicotine Stained Teeth</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/nicotine-stained-teeth/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/nicotine-stained-teeth/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 13 Sep 2009 18:16:51 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Manipulation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Nicotine Stained Teeth]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photo effect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photoshop tutorials]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://photoshopfacelift.cashfiles.net/?p=94</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/nicotine-stained-teeth/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/08/nicotine-stained-teeth06-150x86.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="nicotine-stained-teeth06" title="nicotine-stained-teeth06" /></a>Step-By-Step Instructions: 1. Open in Photoshop the photograph of a person whose white teeth are displayed. 2. Click the &#8220;Edit in Quick Mask Mode&#8221; toggle button. 3. Select the Paint Brush tool and choose black as your color. 4. Zoom in on the teeth and paint over them. (When you are in Quick Mask Mode, the paint will be a transparent red). 5. When you are finished, click the &#8220;Edit in Standard Mode&#8221; toggle button. 6. Goto Select &#62; Inverse. The teeth should now be selected. 7. Goto Image &#62; Adjustments &#62; Color Balance. 8. Adjust the bottom slider under Midtones to &#8220;Yellow&#8221;. Do this for the Shadows also. 9. The bright teeth should now be nicotine yellowish color. // //]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-559" title="nicotine-stained-teeth06" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/08/nicotine-stained-teeth06-150x86.jpg" alt="nicotine-stained-teeth06" width="100" height="57" /><br />
</strong></p>
<p><strong>Step-By-Step Instructions:</strong><br />
1. Open in Photoshop the photograph of a person whose white teeth are displayed.<span id="more-560"></span></p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/nicotine-stained-teeth/nicotine-stained-teeth01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. Click the &#8220;Edit in Quick Mask Mode&#8221; toggle button.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/nicotine-stained-teeth/nicotine-stained-teeth02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Select the Paint Brush tool and choose black as your color.<br />
4. Zoom in on the teeth and paint over them. (When you are in Quick Mask Mode, the paint will be a transparent red).</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/nicotine-stained-teeth/nicotine-stained-teeth03.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. When you are finished, click the &#8220;Edit in Standard Mode&#8221; toggle button.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/nicotine-stained-teeth/nicotine-stained-teeth04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. Goto Select &gt; Inverse. The teeth should now be selected.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/nicotine-stained-teeth/nicotine-stained-teeth05.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Goto Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Color Balance.<br />
8. Adjust the bottom slider under Midtones to &#8220;Yellow&#8221;. Do this for the Shadows also.<br />
9. The bright teeth should now be nicotine yellowish color.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/nicotine-stained-teeth/nicotine-stained-teeth06.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<div style="border-bottom: 1px solid #090964; padding: 3px; width: 90%;"><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[
// <![CDATA[ google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828"; /* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Light Brown */ google_ad_slot = "7074263568"; google_ad_width = 336; google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[
// <![CDATA[ google_protectAndRun("ads_core.google_render_ad", google_handleError, google_render_ad);
// ]]&gt;</script><ins style="border: medium none; margin: 0pt; padding: 0pt; display: inline-table; height: 280px; position: relative; visibility: visible; width: 336px;"><ins style="border: medium none; margin: 0pt; padding: 0pt; display: block; height: 280px; position: relative; visibility: visible; width: 336px;"></ins></ins></div>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/nicotine-stained-teeth/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Making Old Photos</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/making-old-photos/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/making-old-photos/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 13 Sep 2009 18:15:19 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Manipulation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Making Old Photos]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photo effect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photoshop tutorials]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://photoshopfacelift.cashfiles.net/?p=91</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/making-old-photos/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/08/making-old-photos05-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="making-old-photos05" title="making-old-photos05" /></a>Summary: In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll learn to take a new photograph and give it all the elements of an old, aged photograph. Step-By-Step Instructions: 1. Open up a new photograph in Photoshop. 2. Goto Image &#62; Adjustments &#62; Desaturate. This will make the photograph black and white. 3. Goto Image &#62; Adjustments &#62; Color Balance. Slide the bottom slider to the Yellow side. This will give the photo a sepia look. 4. Goto Filter &#62; Artistic &#62; Film Grain. Adjust the Grain, Highlight Area, and Intensity sliders until you have the aged look you want for the photo. 5. You&#8217;re done! You should now have your old, aged photograph! // //]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-557" title="making-old-photos05" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/08/making-old-photos05-150x150.jpg" alt="making-old-photos05" width="100" height="100" /><br />
</strong></p>
<p><strong>Summary:</strong><br />
In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll learn to take a new photograph and give it all the elements of an old, aged photograph.<br />
<span id="more-558"></span><br />
<strong>Step-By-Step Instructions:</strong><br />
1. Open up a new photograph in Photoshop.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/making-old-photos/making-old-photos01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. Goto Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Desaturate. This will make the photograph black and white.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/making-old-photos/making-old-photos02.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Goto Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Color Balance. Slide the bottom slider to the Yellow side. This will give the photo a sepia look.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/making-old-photos/making-old-photos03.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. Goto Filter &gt; Artistic &gt; Film Grain. Adjust the Grain, Highlight Area, and Intensity sliders until you have the aged look you want for the photo.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/making-old-photos/making-old-photos04.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. You&#8217;re done! You should now have your old, aged photograph!</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/making-old-photos/making-old-photos05.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<div style="border-bottom: 1px solid #090964; padding: 3px; width: 90%;"><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[
// <![CDATA[ google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828"; /* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Light Brown */ google_ad_slot = "7074263568"; google_ad_width = 336; google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[
// <![CDATA[ google_protectAndRun("ads_core.google_render_ad", google_handleError, google_render_ad);
// ]]&gt;</script><ins style="border: medium none; margin: 0pt; padding: 0pt; display: inline-table; height: 280px; position: relative; visibility: visible; width: 336px;"><ins style="border: medium none; margin: 0pt; padding: 0pt; display: block; height: 280px; position: relative; visibility: visible; width: 336px;"></ins></ins></div>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/making-old-photos/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Fruit With Eyes</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/fruit-with-eyes/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/fruit-with-eyes/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 13 Sep 2009 18:12:26 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Manipulation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Fruit With Eyes]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photo effect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photoshop tutorials]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://photoshopfacelift.cashfiles.net/?p=87</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/fruit-with-eyes/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/08/fruit-with-eyes07-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="fruit-with-eyes07" title="fruit-with-eyes07" /></a>Step-By-Step Instructions: 1. Open in Photoshop a photograph of fruit. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll use a banana. 2. Create a new layer. Name it &#8220;Eye&#8221;. 3. Select the Eliptical Marquee tool and create a circlular selection for the eye. 4. Select the Gradient tool and make sure is a Radial Gradient. Set the gradient colors from a light color of the fruit to a dark color of the fruit. Because I&#8217;m using a banana, I chose a very light yellow to a dark orangish/yellow. 5. Drag the gradient tool from top right to bottom left across the circular selection. 6. Create a new layer. 7. Select the Eliptical Marquee tool and create another circular selection over the eye for the pupil. 8. Select the Paint Bucket tool. Choose black as your color. Fill in the circular selection with black. 9. Click CTRL+E to merge the top layer with the pupil with the layer of the eye ball just below it. 10. Select the Move Tool. Hold down the ALT key and drag the eyeball to create a duplicate. Move the duplicate where the other eye should go. (If one eye overlaps the other due to the angle, then make sure [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-555" title="fruit-with-eyes07" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/08/fruit-with-eyes07-150x150.jpg" alt="fruit-with-eyes07" width="99" height="99" /><br />
</strong></p>
<p><strong>Step-By-Step Instructions:</strong><br />
1. Open in Photoshop a photograph of fruit. In this tutorial, we&#8217;ll use a banana.<span id="more-556"></span></p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/fruit-with-eyes/fruit-with-eyes01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. Create a new layer. Name it &#8220;Eye&#8221;.<br />
3. Select the Eliptical Marquee tool and create a circlular selection for the eye.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/fruit-with-eyes/fruit-with-eyes02.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. Select the Gradient tool and make sure is a Radial Gradient. Set the gradient colors from a light color of the fruit to a dark color of the fruit. Because I&#8217;m using a banana, I chose a very light yellow to a dark orangish/yellow.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/fruit-with-eyes/fruit-with-eyes03.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Drag the gradient tool from top right to bottom left across the circular selection.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/fruit-with-eyes/fruit-with-eyes04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. Create a new layer.<br />
7. Select the Eliptical Marquee tool and create another circular selection over the eye for the pupil.<br />
8. Select the Paint Bucket tool. Choose black as your color. Fill in the circular selection with black.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/fruit-with-eyes/fruit-with-eyes05.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>9. Click CTRL+E to merge the top layer with the pupil with the layer of the eye ball just below it.<br />
10. Select the Move Tool. Hold down the ALT key and drag the eyeball to create a duplicate. Move the duplicate where the other eye should go. (If one eye overlaps the other due to the angle, then make sure the layer with the overlapping eye is the top layer in your Layers Palette).<br />
<img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/fruit-with-eyes/fruit-with-eyes06.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>11. Select the layer with the fruit (banana).<br />
12. Select the Burn Tool.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/fruit-with-eyes/burntool.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>13. Then click and burn around the areas where the eyes are. This will create the effect of an indentation for the eyes to be resting on and help to merge the eyes better with the fruit.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/fruit-with-eyes/fruit-with-eyes07.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/fruit-with-eyes/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Fix Torn Photos</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/fix-torn-photos/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/fix-torn-photos/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 13 Sep 2009 18:09:57 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Manipulation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Fix Torn Photos]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photoshop tutorials]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://photoshopfacelift.cashfiles.net/?p=83</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/fix-torn-photos/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/08/fix-torn-photos08-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="fix-torn-photos08" title="fix-torn-photos08" /></a>Step-By-Step Instructions: 1. Using your scanner, scan in the torn photo so that it is an image file. 2. Open the image of the torn photo into Photoshop. 3. Goto Image &#62; Mode &#62; RGB to make sure you are in an mode that allows you to edit with multiple layers. 4. Select the Polygonal Lasso tool. 5. Use the Lasso tool to create a selection around the left half of the torn photo. 6. Click CTRL+X to cut the selection. 7. Click CTRL+V to paste the selection onto a new layer. 8. With the new layer selected, click CTRL+T. This will put you into Free Transform mode. 9. Now move your cursor to the corner of the photo and when you see your cursor change to the rotation icon, then click down and drag to straight out the photo (do this same step to the other side of the photo on the other layer if needed). 10. With both layers straightened, select one of the layers and move them so that they line up to create a complete photo. 11. The tear might remove some of the photograph, so we&#8217;ll repair this in the following steps. 11. Goto Layer [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-553" title="fix-torn-photos08" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/08/fix-torn-photos08-150x150.jpg" alt="fix-torn-photos08" width="100" height="100" /><br />
</strong></p>
<p><strong>Step-By-Step Instructions:</strong><br />
1. Using your scanner, scan in the torn photo so that it is an image file.<br />
2. Open the image of the torn photo into Photoshop.<span id="more-554"></span></p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/fix-torn-photos/fix-torn-photos01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Goto Image &gt; Mode &gt; RGB to make sure you are in an mode that allows you to edit with multiple layers.<br />
4. Select the Polygonal Lasso tool.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/fix-torn-photos/polygonallasso.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Use the Lasso tool to create a selection around the left half of the torn photo.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/fix-torn-photos/fix-torn-photos02.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. Click CTRL+X to cut the selection.<br />
7. Click CTRL+V to paste the selection onto a new layer.<br />
8. With the new layer selected, click CTRL+T. This will put you into Free Transform mode.<br />
9. Now move your cursor to the corner of the photo and when you see your cursor change to the rotation icon, then click down and drag to straight out the photo (do this same step to the other side of the photo on the other layer if needed).</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/fix-torn-photos/fix-torn-photos03.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>10. With both layers straightened, select one of the layers and move them so that they line up to create a complete photo.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/fix-torn-photos/fix-torn-photos04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>11. The tear might remove some of the photograph, so we&#8217;ll repair this in the following steps. 11. Goto Layer &gt; Flatten Image to merge all the layers.<br />
12. Select the Clone Stamp tool.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/fix-torn-photos/clonestamp.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>13. Zoom in on the tear that is going down the middle. Hold down the ALT key and select an area to the left or right of the tear.<br />
14. Let go of the ALT key and paint over the tear down the middle.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/fix-torn-photos/fix-torn-photos05.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>15. Do steps 13 and 14 until you have completely painted over the tear and you should now have your repaired torn photograph.<br />
16. When you are done, you will notice that there areas that the tear destroyed (ie. the eyes). You will have to re-create these.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/fix-torn-photos/fix-torn-photos06.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>17. Select the Paint Brush tool. Choose a small brush size. Zoom in on the eye (or other area that was destroyed in the photo) that needs to be fixed.<br />
18. Hold down the ALT key, then select a color of what&#8217;s left of the eye (or other feature that was destroyed in the photo) to bring it in as your foreground color.<br />
19. Begin redrawing the eye or other features that were destroyed.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/fix-torn-photos/fix-torn-photos07.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>20. Select the Smudge tool. Set the Strength to around 20%.<br />
21. Begin smudging any inconsistant gradients in the clone stamped areas.<br />
22. You should now have your fixed torn photo.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/fix-torn-photos/fix-torn-photos08.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/fix-torn-photos/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Eye Shadow Coloring</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/eye-shadow-coloring/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/eye-shadow-coloring/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 13 Sep 2009 18:07:35 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Manipulation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Eye Shadow Coloring]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photo effect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photoshop tutorials]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://photoshopfacelift.cashfiles.net/?p=80</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/eye-shadow-coloring/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/08/eyeshadow-coloring04-150x88.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="eyeshadow-coloring04" title="eyeshadow-coloring04" /></a>Step-By-Step Instructions: 1. Open the photograph of the person&#8217;s eyes into Photoshop. 2. Create a new layer. Name it &#8220;Eye Shadow&#8221;. 3. Select the Paint Brush tool. Set the Opacity to 30%. 4. Select the color for the eyeshadow from the Swatches palette. 5. Choose an appropriate brush size, then zoom in on the left eye. 6. Begin coloring over the lid of the eye with one pass. 7. Then paint another pass over the eye, but only near the edge of the eye lid. 8. Select the Smudge tool. Smudge over the eye lid in strokes going away from the edge of the eye lid. 9. You should now have your colored eye shadow.]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-551" title="eyeshadow-coloring04" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/08/eyeshadow-coloring04-150x88.jpg" alt="eyeshadow-coloring04" width="100" height="59" /><br />
</strong></p>
<p><strong>Step-By-Step Instructions:</strong><br />
1. Open the photograph of the person&#8217;s eyes into Photoshop.<span id="more-552"></span></p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/eyeshadow-coloring/eyeshadow-coloring01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. Create a new layer. Name it &#8220;Eye Shadow&#8221;.<br />
3. Select the Paint Brush tool. Set the Opacity to 30%.<br />
4. Select the color for the eyeshadow from the Swatches palette.<br />
5. Choose an appropriate brush size, then zoom in on the left eye.<br />
6. Begin coloring over the lid of the eye with one pass.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/eyeshadow-coloring/eyeshadow-coloring02.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Then paint another pass over the eye, but only near the edge of the eye lid.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/eyeshadow-coloring/eyeshadow-coloring03.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>8. Select the Smudge tool. Smudge over the eye lid in strokes going away from the edge of the eye lid.<br />
9. You should now have your colored eye shadow.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/eyeshadow-coloring/eyeshadow-coloring04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/eye-shadow-coloring/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Evil Grin</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/evil-grin/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/evil-grin/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 13 Sep 2009 18:05:53 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Manipulation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Evil Grin]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photoshop tutorials]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://photoshopfacelift.cashfiles.net/?p=77</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/evil-grin/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/08/evil-grin04-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="evil-grin04" title="evil-grin04" /></a>Step-By-Step Instructions: 1. In Photoshop, open a photograph of a person who has a big smile showing all their teeth. 2. Goto Filter &#62; Liquify. 3. The Liquify box will appear. Under Tool Options, select an appropriate sized brush. One that is not too big for the eyebrows. 4. Using the brush, click and push the eye brows down so that they appear to look angry. 5. If necessary click and push the corners of the mouth up so that the mouth appears to be grinning even more than before. 6. When you are done, click OK. 7. You should now have your evil grin face expression!]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-549" title="evil-grin04" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/08/evil-grin04-150x150.jpg" alt="evil-grin04" width="100" height="100" /><br />
</strong></p>
<p><strong>Step-By-Step Instructions:</strong><br />
1. In Photoshop, open a photograph of a person who has a big smile showing all their teeth.<span id="more-550"></span></p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/evil-grin/evil-grin01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. Goto Filter &gt; Liquify.<br />
3. The Liquify box will appear. Under Tool Options, select an appropriate sized brush. One that is not too big for the eyebrows.<br />
4. Using the brush, click and push the eye brows down so that they appear to look angry.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/evil-grin/evil-grin02.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. If necessary click and push the corners of the mouth up so that the mouth appears to be grinning even more than before.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/evil-grin/evil-grin03.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. When you are done, click OK.<br />
7. You should now have your evil grin face expression!</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/evil-grin/evil-grin04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/evil-grin/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Edit License Plates</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/edit-license-plates/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/edit-license-plates/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 13 Sep 2009 18:04:59 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Manipulation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Edit License Plates]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photoshop tutorials]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://photoshopfacelift.cashfiles.net/?p=74</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/edit-license-plates/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/08/edit-license-plate05-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="edit-license-plate05" title="edit-license-plate05" /></a>Step-By-Step Instructions: 1. Open the photograph of the car and its license plate. 2. Zoom in on the license plate and select the Clone Stamp tool. 3. Hold down the ALT key and select the color around the numbers on the license plate. 4. Let go of the ALT key and paint over the numbers. 5. Do steps 3 and 4 until the license plate is a clean slate. 6. Select the Type tool. 7. Choose a font that looks close to the previous license plate numbers. 8. Type out what you want the license plate to say. 9. You should now have your edited license plate. // //]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-547" title="edit-license-plate05" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/08/edit-license-plate05-150x150.jpg" alt="edit-license-plate05" width="100" height="100" /><br />
</strong></p>
<p><strong>Step-By-Step Instructions:</strong><br />
1. Open the photograph of the car and its license plate.<span id="more-548"></span></p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/edit-license-plates/edit-license-plate01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. Zoom in on the license plate and select the Clone Stamp tool.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/edit-license-plates/clonestamp.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Hold down the ALT key and select the color around the numbers on the license plate.<br />
4. Let go of the ALT key and paint over the numbers.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/edit-license-plates/edit-license-plate02.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>5. Do steps 3 and 4 until the license plate is a clean slate.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/edit-license-plates/edit-license-plate03.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. Select the Type tool.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/edit-license-plates/typetool.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Choose a font that looks close to the previous license plate numbers.<br />
8. Type out what you want the license plate to say.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/edit-license-plates/edit-license-plate04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>9. You should now have your edited license plate.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/edit-license-plates/edit-license-plate05.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<div style="border-bottom: 1px solid #090964; padding: 3px; width: 90%;"><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[
// <![CDATA[ google_ad_client = "pub-1863324194225828"; /* 336x280, created 2/16/09 Light Brown */ google_ad_slot = "7074263568"; google_ad_width = 336; google_ad_height = 280;
// ]]&gt;</script> <script src="http://pagead2.googlesyndication.com/pagead/show_ads.js" type="text/javascript">
</script><script type="text/javascript">// <![CDATA[
// <![CDATA[ google_protectAndRun("ads_core.google_render_ad", google_handleError, google_render_ad);
// ]]&gt;</script><ins style="border: medium none; margin: 0pt; padding: 0pt; display: inline-table; height: 280px; position: relative; visibility: visible; width: 336px;"><ins style="border: medium none; margin: 0pt; padding: 0pt; display: block; height: 280px; position: relative; visibility: visible; width: 336px;"></ins></ins></div>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/edit-license-plates/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Dumbo Ears</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/dumbo-ears/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/dumbo-ears/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 13 Sep 2009 18:04:02 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Manipulation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Dumbo Ears]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photo effect]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://photoshopfacelift.cashfiles.net/?p=71</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/dumbo-ears/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/08/dumbo-ears05-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="dumbo-ears05" title="dumbo-ears05" /></a>Step-By-Step Instructions: 1. Open a photograph of a person&#8217;s head, the picture needs to be a frontal view [Head Photo]. 2. Open another photograph of another person&#8217;s ears, but the picture needs to be in profile view [Ear Photo]. 3. Select the Polygonal Lasso tool and select around the ear in the [Ear Photo]. 4. Click CTRL+C to copy the ear. 5. Goto the [Head Photo] and click CTRL+V to paste the ear in a new layer over the Head layer. 6. Goto CTRL+T to enter Free Transform mode. Hold down the Shift key and select one of the corner shape handles. Drag and size the ear down until it is proportionate to the head on the layer underneath. 10. Do steps 3 through 9, but goto Edit &#62; Transform &#62; Flip Horizontal, so that the ear fits with the other side of the head. 11. Goto Image &#62; Adjustments &#62; Brightness/Contrast. Adjust the Brightness and Contrast sliders so that the ear fits with the light source in the photo. 11. You should now have your head with big dumbo ears.]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-546" title="dumbo-ears05" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/08/dumbo-ears05-150x150.jpg" alt="dumbo-ears05" width="100" height="100" /><br />
</strong></p>
<p><strong>Step-By-Step Instructions:</strong><br />
1. Open a photograph of a person&#8217;s head, the picture needs to be a frontal view [Head Photo].<span id="more-71"></span></p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/dumbo-ears/dumbo-ears01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. Open another photograph of another person&#8217;s ears, but the picture needs to be in profile view [Ear Photo].</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/dumbo-ears/dumbo-ears02.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Select the Polygonal Lasso tool and select around the ear in the [Ear Photo].</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/dumbo-ears/polygonallasso.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. Click CTRL+C to copy the ear.<br />
5. Goto the [Head Photo] and click CTRL+V to paste the ear in a new layer over the Head layer.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/dumbo-ears/dumbo-ears03.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>6. Goto CTRL+T to enter Free Transform mode. Hold down the Shift key and select one of the corner shape handles. Drag and size the ear down until it is proportionate to the head on the layer underneath.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/dumbo-ears/dumbo-ears04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>10. Do steps 3 through 9, but goto Edit &gt; Transform &gt; Flip Horizontal, so that the ear fits with the other side of the head.<br />
11. Goto Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Brightness/Contrast. Adjust the Brightness and Contrast sliders so that the ear fits with the light source in the photo.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/dumbo-ears/dumbo-ears05.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>11. You should now have your head with big dumbo ears.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/dumbo-ears/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Adding A Different Mouth</title>
		<link>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/adding-a-different-mouth/</link>
		<comments>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/adding-a-different-mouth/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 13 Sep 2009 18:02:08 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>kpmedia</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Manipulation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Add Different Mouth]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photo effect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photoshop tutorials]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://photoshopfacelift.cashfiles.net/?p=68</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[<a href="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/adding-a-different-mouth/"><img align="left" hspace="5" width="150" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/08/adding-a-different-mouth07-150x150.jpg" class="alignleft wp-post-image tfe" alt="adding-a-different-mouth07" title="adding-a-different-mouth07" /></a>1. Open two photographs in Photoshop. [Photograph 1] The photo of the person you will be adding a mouth to. [Photograph 2] The photo that has the mouth you want to use. 2. Select the Polygonal Lasso tool. 3. Create a lasso selection around the mouth from [Photograph 2]. 4. Click CTRL+C to copy the mouth. 5. Select [Photograph 1] and click CTRL+V to paste the mouth onto a new layer overlapping the original photo. 6. Click CTRL+T to enter Free Transform mode. Use the shape handles to resize the overlapping mouth to fit proportionately with the person&#8217;s face on the layer below. 7. Click the layer underneath the mouth layer. 8. Goto Image &#62; Adjustments &#62; Brightness/Contrast. Adjust the Brightness and Contrast sliders so that the mouth matches better with the new face. 9. Goto Image &#62; Adjustments &#62; Hue/Saturation. Adjust the Hue and Saturation sliders so that the mouth matches better with the new face. 10. Select the Eraser tool. Erase any areas of skin from the overlapping mouth that got carried over from the old photo. 11. Congratulations, you should now have your new mouth!]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img class="alignnone size-thumbnail wp-image-545" title="adding-a-different-mouth07" src="http://tutorials-photoshop.com/wp-content/uploads/2009/08/adding-a-different-mouth07-150x150.jpg" alt="adding-a-different-mouth07" width="100" height="100" /></p>
<p>1. Open two photographs in Photoshop.<br />
[Photograph 1] The photo of the person you will be adding a mouth to.<br />
[Photograph 2] The photo that has the mouth you want to use.<span id="more-68"></span></p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/adding-a-different-mouth/adding-a-different-mouth01.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>2. Select the Polygonal Lasso tool.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/adding-a-different-mouth/adding-a-different-mouth02.gif" alt="" /></p>
<p>3. Create a lasso selection around the mouth from [Photograph 2].</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/adding-a-different-mouth/adding-a-different-mouth03.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>4. Click CTRL+C to copy the mouth.<br />
5. Select [Photograph 1] and click CTRL+V to paste the mouth onto a new layer overlapping the original photo.<br />
6. Click CTRL+T to enter Free Transform mode. Use the shape handles to resize the overlapping mouth to fit proportionately with the person&#8217;s face on the layer below.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/adding-a-different-mouth/adding-a-different-mouth04.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>7. Click the layer underneath the mouth layer.<br />
8. Goto Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Brightness/Contrast. Adjust the Brightness and Contrast sliders so that the mouth matches better with the new face.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/adding-a-different-mouth/adding-a-different-mouth05.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>9. Goto Image &gt; Adjustments &gt; Hue/Saturation. Adjust the Hue and Saturation sliders so that the mouth matches better with the new face.</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/adding-a-different-mouth/adding-a-different-mouth06.jpg" alt="" /></p>
<p>10. Select the Eraser tool. Erase any areas of skin from the overlapping mouth that got carried over from the old photo.<br />
11. Congratulations, you should now have your new mouth!</p>
<p><img src="http://photoshopfacelift.com/tutorials/adding-a-different-mouth/adding-a-different-mouth07.jpg" alt="" /></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://tutorials-photoshop.com/photo-manipulation/adding-a-different-mouth/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
	</channel>
</rss>
<!-- This Quick Cache file was built for (  tutorials-photoshop.com/feed/ ) in 7.43144 seconds, on Sep 8th, 2010 at 8:27 pm UTC. -->
<!-- This Quick Cache file will automatically expire ( and be re-built automatically ) on Sep 8th, 2010 at 9:27 pm UTC -->